Nec 2400 Ipx Users Manual NEAX2400 Circuit Card

PDF NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1 T E X T F I L E S

IPX Circuit Card Manual Iss 1(2429610w) IPX Circuit Card Manual Iss 1(2429610w)

NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1 NEC_IPX_Circuit_Card_Manual_Issue_1 www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

2400 IPX to the manual 0664b456-d22f-4a22-a36c-0ef294a737d6

2015-01-24

: Nec Nec-2400-Ipx-Users-Manual-331892 nec-2400-ipx-users-manual-331892 nec pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 644 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

OCTOBER, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

NDA-24296

ISSUE 1

STOCK # 200774

Circuit Card Manual

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER

NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or

features, at any time, without notice.

NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and

customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,

Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC

America, Inc.

NEAX® and Dterm® are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.

NEC America, Inc.

Printed in the U.S.A

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 1/9

NDA-24296

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

i 1

ii 1

iii 1

iv 1

v 1

vi 1

vii 1

viii 1

ix 1

x 1

xi 1

xii 1

1 1

2 1

3 1

5 1

6 1

7 1

9 1

10 1

11 1

12 1

13 1

14 1

15 1

16 1

17 1

18 1

19 1

20 1

21 1

22 1

23 1

24 1

25 1

26 1

27 1

28 1

29 1

30 1

31 1

32 1

33 1

34 1

35 1

36 1

37 1

38 1

39 1

40 1

41 1

42 1

43 1

44 1

45 1

46 1

47 1

48 1

49 1

50 1

51 1

52 1

53 1

54 1

55 1

56 1

57 1

58 1

59 1

60 1

61 1

62 1

63 1

64 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 2/9

NDA-24296

65 1

66 1

67 1

68 1

69 1

70 1

71 1

72 1

73 1

74 1

75 1

76 1

77 1

78 1

79 1

80 1

81 1

82 1

83 1

84 1

85 1

86 1

87 1

88 1

89 1

90 1

91 1

92 1

93 1

94 1

95 1

96 1

97 1

98 1

99 1

100 1

101 1

102 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

103 1

104 1

105 1

106 1

107 1

108 1

109 1

110 1

111 1

112 1

113 1

114 1

115 1

116 1

117 1

118 1

119 1

120 1

121 1

122 1

123 1

124 1

125 1

126 1

127 1

128 1

129 1

130 1

131 1

132 1

133 1

134 1

135 1

136 1

137 1

138 1

139 1

140 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 3/9

NDA-24296

141 1

142 1

143 1

144 1

145 1

146 1

147 1

148 1

149 1

150 1

151 1

152 1

153 1

154 1

155 1

156 1

157 1

158 1

159 1

160 1

161 1

162 1

163 1

164 1

165 1

166 1

167 1

168 1

169 1

170 1

171 1

172 1

173 1

174 1

175 1

176 1

177 1

178 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

179 1

180 1

181 1

182 1

183 1

184 1

185 1

186 1

187 1

188 1

189 1

190 1

191 1

192 1

193 1

194 1

195 1

196 1

197 1

198 1

199 1

200 1

201 1

202 1

203 1

204 1

205 1

206 1

207 1

208 1

209 1

210 1

211 1

212 1

213 1

214 1

215 1

216 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 4/9

NDA-24296

217 1

218 1

219 1

220 1

221 1

222 1

223 1

224 1

225 1

226 1

227 1

228 1

229 1

230 1

231 1

232 1

233 1

234 1

235 1

236 1

237 1

238 1

239 1

240 1

241 1

242 1

243 1

244 1

245 1

246 1

247 1

248 1

249 1

250 1

251 1

252 1

253 1

254 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

255 1

256 1

257 1

258 1

259 1

260 1

261 1

262 1

263 1

264 1

265 1

266 1

267 1

268 1

269 1

270 1

271 1

272 1

273 1

274 1

275 1

276 1

277 1

278 1

279 1

280 1

281 1

282 1

283 1

284 1

285 1

286 1

287 1

288 1

289 1

290 1

291 1

292 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 5/9

NDA-24296

293 1

294 1

295 1

296 1

297 1

298 1

299 1

300 1

301 1

302 1

303 1

304 1

305 1

306 1

307 1

308 1

309 1

310 1

311 1

312 1

313 1

314 1

315 1

316 1

317 1

318 1

319 1

320 1

321 1

322 1

323 1

324 1

325 1

326 1

327 1

328 1

329 1

330 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

331 1

332 1

333 1

334 1

335 1

336 1

337 1

338 1

339 1

340 1

341 1

342 1

343 1

344 1

345 1

346 1

347 1

348 1

349 1

350 1

351 1

352 1

353 1

354 1

355 1

356 1

357 1

358 1

359 1

360 1

361 1

362 1

363 1

364 1

365 1

366 1

367 1

368 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 6/9

NDA-24296

369 1

370 1

371 1

372 1

373 1

374 1

375 1

376 1

377 1

378 1

379 1

380 1

381 1

382 1

383 1

384 1

385 1

386 1

387 1

388 1

389 1

390 1

391 1

392 1

393 1

394 1

395 1

396 1

397 1

398 1

399 1

400 1

401 1

402 1

403 1

404 1

405 1

406 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

407 1

408 1

409 1

410 1

411 1

412 1

413 1

414 1

415 1

416 1

417 1

418 1

419 1

420 1

421 1

422 1

423 1

424 1

425 1

426 1

427 1

428 1

429 1

430 1

431 1

432 1

433 1

434 1

435 1

436 1

437 1

438 1

439 1

440 1

441 1

442 1

443 1

444 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 7/9

NDA-24296

445 1

446 1

447 1

448 1

449 1

450 1

451 1

452 1

453 1

454 1

455 1

456 1

457 1

458 1

459 1

460 1

461 1

462 1

463 1

464 1

465 1

466 1

467 1

468 1

469 1

470 1

471 1

472 1

473 1

474 1

475 1

476 1

477 1

478 1

479 1

480 1

481 1

482 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

483 1

484 1

485 1

486 1

487 1

488 1

489 1

490 1

491 1

492 1

493 1

494 1

495 1

496 1

497 1

498 1

499 1

500 1

501 1

502 1

503 1

504 1

505 1

506 1

507 1

508 1

509 1

510 1

511 1

512 1

513 1

514 1

515 1

516 1

517 1

518 1

519 1

520 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 8/9

NDA-24296

521 1

522 1

523 1

524 1

525 1

526 1

527 1

528 1

529 1

530 1

531 1

532 1

533 1

534 1

535 1

536 1

537 1

538 1

539 1

540 1

541 1

542 1

543 1

544 1

545 1

546 1

547 1

548 1

549 1

550 1

551 1

552 1

553 1

554 1

555 1

556 1

557 1

558 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

559 1

560 1

561 1

562 1

563 1

564 1

565 1

566 1

567 1

568 1

569 1

570 1

571 1

572 1

573 1

574 1

575 1

576 1

577 1

578 1

579 1

580 1

581 1

582 1

583 1

584 1

585 1

586 1

587 1

588 1

589 1

590 1

591 1

592 1

593 1

594 1

595 1

596 1

PAG E No. ISSUE No.

12345678

ISSUE 1 ISSUE 2 ISSUE 3 ISSUE 4

DATE OCTOB ER, 20 00 DATE DATE DATE

ISSUE 5 ISSUE 6 ISSUE 7 ISSUE 8

DATE DATE DATE DATE

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual Revision Sheet 9/9

NDA-24296

597 1

598 1

599 1

600 1

601 1

602 1

603 1

604 1

605 1

606 1

607 1

608 1

609 1

610 1

611 1

612 1

613 1

614 1

615 1

616 1

617 1

618 1

PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678 PAGE No. ISSUE No.

12345678

NDA-24296

ISSUE 1

OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX

Circuit Card Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page

NDA-24296 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Page i

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .iii

LIST OF TABLES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xi

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

SN1695 CPRBF-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

PH-DK10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

PH-IO24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

PH-M22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

PH-PC45 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

PZ-ME44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

1. GENERAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

TABLE OF CONTENTS NDA-24296

Page ii

Revision 1.0

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)

Page

PA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

PA-8COTBJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

PA-16COTBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

PA-CS02-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

PA-CS08-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

PA-8LCBR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

PA-16LCBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

PA-16LCBJ-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

PA-16LCBJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

PA-M69 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

PA-M96 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

PA-M103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

PA-8RSTK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

PA-2CCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

PA-24CCTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

PA-2DCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

PA-ILCG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

PA-4ILCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

PA-8ILCE-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

PA-4DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

PA-4DATB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

PH-M16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

PA-4AMPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

PA-8TLTR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

PA-M87 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

PA-24PRTB-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

LIST OF FIGURES

Figure Title Page

NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURES

Page iii

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

Figure 2-2 CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26

Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41

Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296

Page iv

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Figure 2-56 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149

Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Figure 2-73 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151

Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Figure 2-76 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURES

Page v

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156

Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

Figure 3-6 Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an

External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . 207

Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Figure 3-21 Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Figure 3-24 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296

Page vi

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232

Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an

External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . 236

Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244

Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250

Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262

Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266

Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268

Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273

Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

Figure 3-54 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283

Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288

Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289

Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290

Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291

Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300

Figure 3-65 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Figure 3-69 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURES

Page vii

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 3-73 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325

Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331

Figure 3-77 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332

Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334

Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341

Figure 3-81 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342

Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344

Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351

Figure 3-85 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352

Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368

Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370

Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371

Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379

Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387

Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Figure 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389

Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390

Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391

Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392

Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394

Figure 3-106 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397

Figure 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403

Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405

Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408

Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409

LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296

Page viii

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418

Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424

Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425

Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433

Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436

Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439

Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440

Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444

Figure 3-128 Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Figure 3-129 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448

Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450

Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460

Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461

Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464

Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466

Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468

Figure 3-140 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475

Figure 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476

Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479

Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486

Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487

Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488

Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492

Figure 3-148 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496

Figure 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497

Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501

Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506

Figure 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507

Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509

Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Figure 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519

Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521

Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523

Figure 3-160 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527

NDA-24296 LIST OF FIGURES

Page ix

Revision 1.0

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)

Figure Title Page

Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531

Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533

Figure 3-163 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537

Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541

Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543

Figure 3-166 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545

Figure 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546

Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548

Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550

Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565

Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID • 2W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566

Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

Figure 3-175 “2400 ODT CABLE” Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568

Figure 3-176 “2400 ODT CABLE-A” Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569

Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571

Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573

Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (2/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (3/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (4/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580

Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582

Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583

Figure 3-183 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

Figure 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590

Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594

Figure 3-187 Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596

Figure 3-188 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602

Figure 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603

Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 605

Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607

Figure 3-192 Available Locations for Loopback Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609

Figure 3-193 LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615

Figure 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616

LIST OF FIGURES NDA-24296

Page x

Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF TABLES

Table Title Page

NDA-24296 (E) CHAPTER 3

Page xi

Revision 1.0

Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Table 3-3 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354

Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Table 3-5 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361

Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441

Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442

Table 3-8 Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528

Table 3-13 Jumper Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538

Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296 (E)

Page xii

Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 1

Revision 1.0

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL

This manual provides circuit card descriptions for the NEAX2400 IPX system.

This manual is for those persons involved in system setup and administration activities for the NEAX2400 IPX.

For each circuit card the following items are explained:

• General function

• Slot to mount the circuit card

• Precautions for mounting the card

• Location of the electronic devices on the card surface

• Description of the LED

• Description of the switches

• Physical interface

The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and the

Line/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card.

• Control Circuit Card

White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in the

Central Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs.

• Line/Trunk Circuit Card

Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards.

Note: This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IPX.

When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit Card

Manual with the following changes:

• The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IPX;

however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI).

• The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IPX) is

the same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS.

• The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manual’s section on

PH-PC36 (MUX).

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 2

Revision 1.0

2. MOUNTING LOCATION OF CIRCUIT CARD

The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 1-

1. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure

1-2. The control circuit cards for the IPX-U system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in

Figure 1-3 and 1-4.

As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located in

Slots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM).

The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM.

Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 3

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PH-SW10(TSW)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR)

PA-PW54-A(DPWR)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-IO24(IOC)

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

PH-PC40(EMA)

00 01 02 03 04

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 4

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-IO24(IOC)

PH-PC40(EMA)

00 01 02 03 04

(IOC/MISC)

(MISC)

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG0

NEAX2400IMS (IPX)

4-IMG System

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 5

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PW14(PWRSW)

PH-PC20(DLKC0)

PH-PC20(DLKC1)

PH-GT09(GT0)

PH-GT09(GT1)

PH-SW12(TDSW00)

PH-SW12(TDSW01)

PH-SW12(TDSW02)

PH-SW12(TDSW03)

PH-SW12(TDSW10)

PH-SW12(TDSW11)

PH-SW12(TDSW12)

PH-SW12(TDSW13)

PH-CK16/17(PLO0)

PH-CK16/17(PLO1)

(MISC)

TSWM

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG1

NEAX2400IMS (IPX)

4-IMG System

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 6

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG2

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)

4IMG-SYSTEM

NEAX2400 IMS (IPX)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 7

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PA-PW55-A(PWR0)

PA-PW54-A(PWR1)

PIM0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG3

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG2

Dummy/APM

PIM

IMG1

TSWM

PIM

IMG0

LPM

IMG3

NEAX2400IMS(IMX)

4IMG-SYSTEM

NEAX2400 IMS (IPX)

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 8

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (1/5)

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

CMG

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

LMG 4 (0~3)

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 9

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (2/5)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-M22(MMC)

PH-PC43(EMA)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

LMG 4 (0 3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 10

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (3/5)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

(MISC)

TSWM0

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0)

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LMG 4 (0 3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 11

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (4/5)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG2/6/10/14

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK18 (CLK0)

PH-CK18 (CLK1)

TSWM1

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LMG 4 (0~3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 12

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-U System (5/5)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

Dummy

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LMG 4 (0~3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 13

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (1/5)

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

CMG

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

LMG 4 (0~3)

03 04

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ISWM

DUMMY

FANU

CMP

PH-PC43 (EMA)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT) PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-PC23

(LANI)

PZ-PC19

(LANI)

PZ-PC19

(LANI)

PZ-PC23

(LANI)

PZ-PC23

(LANI) PZ-PC23

(LANI)

PH-DK10 (DSPC)

PH-IO24 (IOC)

PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)

PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)

HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)

HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

TSW00 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW01 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW02 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW03 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW10 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW11 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW12 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW13 (PU-SW00-A)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

00 01 02 03 04

PH-PC43 (EMA)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT) PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-M565

(ISAGTA)

PZ-M565

(ISAGTA)

PZ-PC22

(LANI)

PZ-ME44

(MEM) PZ-ME44

(MEM)

PZ-PC22

(LANI)

PZ-PC22

(LANI) PZ-PC22

(LANI)

PH-M22 (MMC)

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 14

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (2/5)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

BSCM

LPM

PH-M22(MMC)

PH-PC43(EMA)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

00 01 02 03 04

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

LMG 4 (0 3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 15

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (3/5)

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PH-PC36 (MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B (PWR0)

PA-PW54-B (PWR1)

PIM0

PH-PW14 (PWRSW)

PH-PC20 (DLKC0)

PH-PC20 (DLKC1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1)

(MISC)

TSWM0

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG1/5/9/13

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0)

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LMG 4 (0 3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 16

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (4/5)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG2/6/10/14

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

PH-PW14 (PWRSW0)

PH-PW14 (PWRSW1)

PH-GT09 (GT0)

PH-GT09 (GT1)

PH-SW12 (TSW00)

PH-SW12 (TSW01)

PH-SW12 (TSW02)

PH-SW12 (TSW03)

PH-SW12 (TSW10)

PH-SW12 (TSW11)

PH-SW12 (TSW12)

PH-SW12 (TSW13)

PH-CK18 (CLK0)

PH-CK18 (CLK1)

TSWM1

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LMG 4 (0~3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 1

Page 17

Revision 1.0

Figure 1-4 Card Mounting Slot for the IPX-UMG System (5/5)

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM3

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM2

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM1

PA-PW55-B(PWR0)

PA-PW54-B(PWR1)

PIM0

Dummy

PIM

IMG3/7/11/15

Dummy

PIM

IMG2/6/10/14

TSWM1

PIM

IMG1/5/9/13

TSWM0

PIM

IMG0/4/8/12

IMG3/7/11/15

NEAX2400 IPX

IPX-UMG SYSTEM

21 22 23201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LMG 4 (0~3)

ISWM

DUMMY

CMP

CMG

CHAPTER 1 NDA-24296

Page 18

Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 19

Revision 1.0

CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card.

•General Function

Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card.

•Mounting Location/Condition

Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If there

are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.

•Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face

layout.

•Lamp Indications

The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.

•Switch Settings

Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning, stan-

dard setting, etc.

•External Interface

If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting

slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are pro-

vided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead

locations and the connecting routes are shown.

In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end of

the explanation for each circuit card.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 20

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

1. General Function

The CPR in 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system consists of the following components.

(a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random

Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-

GT20) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on

the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).

(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in

operation.

(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM.

Figure 2-1 Location of SN1695 CPRBF-A (CPR)

LANI

HDD

FDD

HDD

FDD

CPU CPU

DSP DSP

ISAGT ISAGT

CPR#0 CPR#1

To HUB

To I/O local bus

To MISC bus

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 21

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

The CPR in IPX-UMG system consists of the following components.

(a) CPU BOARD: Contains System Processor Unit (SP)/Common Main Processor Unit (CMP)/Local

Processor Unit (LP), ROM, and 128 to 256 Mbyte of Random Access Memory

(RAM). This board may also contain PCI MEM (PZ-ME44), the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/

PZ-GT20/PZ-M565) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI

(PZ-PC19/PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI).

(b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps.

card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in

operation. Note

(d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the SP/CMP/

LP.

Note: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG system.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 22

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local

Processor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-2. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard

Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards are

located in those busses respectively.

Figure 2-2 CPR Location

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19

(LANI)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

CPR

LPM

ISWM/PIM0 BSCM

Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 23

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

When the SN1695 CPRBF-A is used in the IPX-UMG system, the CPR is mounted on each processor mod-

ule (SP, CMP, and LPs) as shown in Figure 2-3. As to the mounting location of PWR, FDD/HDD, DSP, and

other circuit cards within the CPR, refer to Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-3 The SN1695 CPRBF-A in the IPX-UMG System

00010203 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

000102 0304 05 06 07 0809 10 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

000102 0304 05 06 07 0809 10 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

000102 0304 05 06 07 0809 10 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

000102 0304 05 06 07 0809 10 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

0001020304 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 13 1415 16 1718 19 2021 22 23

0001020304 05 06 0708 0910 1112 13 1415 1617 18 19 202122 23

0001 0203 04 0506 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 2223

000102 0304 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 13 14 151617 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 0304 05 06 0708 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 1920 21 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 2021 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 1415 16 1718 19 2021 22 23

0001 0203 04 0506 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 2223

000102 0304 05 06 0708 09 10 1112 13 14 151617 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 0304 05 06 07 08 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 2122 23

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 13 1415 16 1718 19 2021 22 23

0001 0203 04 0506 07 08 09 10 1112 13 14 15 1617 18 19 20 21 2223

000102 03 04 0506 07 08 0910 1112 1314 1516 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

0001020304

LANI LANI ISAGT

CMG

LMG0

‘

CMP–CPR

SP–CPR

LP–CPR

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 24

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Figure 2-4 CPR Location for IPX-UMG System

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

/PZ-M565 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)

Note 3

PZ-PC19/22/23 (LANI)

Note 2

PZ-PW92 (PWR) PZ-ME44

(PCI MEM)

Note 4

CPR

SP/CMP

/LP

ISWM

Dummy

PIM0

Note 1

Note 1: PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system or in IMG0/4/8/12 of IPX-UMG

system.

Note 2: The required LANI card and its mounting slot differs depending on each processor unit on which the

CPR is mounted within the IPX-UMG system. Refer to the explanation for PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23 card

in this manual or Installation Manual.

Note 3: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in IPX-UMG System.

Note 4: PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) and PZ-M565 (ISAGT) cards are mounted on the CMP only.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 25

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors.

Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial

Standard Architecture (ISA) bus.

Figure 2-5 Front View of CPR

Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IPX-U system only.

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

HDD

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

IMG2

IMG0

IMG3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR(PZ-PW92)

FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224)

Note

[CPR for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 26

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System

Figure 2-7 Front View of CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

HDD

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

IMG2

IMG0

IMG3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR(PZ-PW92)

FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27/28) DSP(PZ-DK224)

LANI(PZ-PC23)

ISAGT

(PZ-GT13)

LANI(PZ-PC19)

[CPR in SP for IPX-UMG System]

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

IMG2

IMG0

IMG3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR(PZ-PW92)

DSP(PZ-DK224)

LANI(PZ-PC22)

ISAGTA

(PZ-M565)

ISAGT

(PZ-GT13)

MEM(PZ-ME44)

[CPR in CMP for IPX-UMG System]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 27

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Figure 2-8 Front View of CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System

DC-40V~-58.6V

PZ-PW92

MBR CPU OPE

-48V OUT

OFF

125V

AC/DC

PALM

ALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

IMG1

SYSTEM SELECT0 STATUS

SENSE

CPURST

SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

WDT

IMG2

IMG0

IMG3

112

SYSTEM SELECT1

13 20

SYSTEM SELECT2

PWR(PZ-PW92)

DSP(PZ-DK224)

LANI(PZ-PC22)

ISAGT

(PZ-GT20)

ISAGT

(PZ-GT13)

[CPR in LP for IPX-UMG System]

Note: This card is required when IMG2/6/10/14 and/or IMG3/7/11/15 is configured.

Note

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 28

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR in

the IMG for 1-IMG, 4-IMG, and IPX-U system.

[Lamp Indications for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

The following shows lamp indications for the CPR in the ISW.

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD

(FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state.

Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 29

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or “E” indicates

the processing failed.

LAMP

NAME DESCRIPTION

STATUS

(DSP)

Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the

SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment

LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.

SENSE STATUS DESCRIPTION

LEFT RIGHT

Not used

“F”

“c”

“d”

1. When Program Install

The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes

execute)

“F”indicated during HD format.

“c”indicated when copying data from FD to HD

“d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

Not used “1”

2. When Program Load

After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to

memory.

“1” is indicated during this process.

“0-9”“0-9”

3. On-line active CPR

The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by

percentage. (00-99%)

Not used

“S”

“b”

“y”

4. On-line stand-by CPR

The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y”

Not used

5. Program & Office data load

“1”indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the

memory

“0” indicated during the Office data load

3Not used “c”“c”indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

4Not used “d”“d”indicated while making the directory on the HD

5Not used

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).

“1”indicated during the Program load.

“0”indicated during the process.

6Not used “F”“F” indicated during HD format.

CNot used “H”The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE.

“H”indicated during the ROM data loading.

“1”“0”

Segment Spinning Indication

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 30

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the SP, CMP, and LP for IPX-UMG system.

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in SP]

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in CMP]

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the SP is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Remains OFF when the CPU is in active state.

Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Not used.

IMG2 (DSP) Green Not used.

IMG3 (DSP) Green Not used.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU of the CMP is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

Flashes green when the CPU is in stand-by state.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW1 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW2 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW3 in the ISWM of CMG is used. Note

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 31

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

[Lamp Indications for the CPR in LP]

Note: No lamp indication in STBY mode.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied.

ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal.

WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred.

CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state.

IMG0 (DSP) Green Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in operation.

IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1/5/9/13 is mounted. Note

IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2/6/10/14 is mounted. Note

IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3/7/11/15 is mounted. Note

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 32

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Note: The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates “E”

meaning the processing failed.

LAMP

NAME DESCRIPTION

STATUS

(DSP)

Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the

SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment

LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below.

SENSE STATUS DESCRIPTION

LEFT RIGHT

“0-9”“0-9”1. On-line active CPR

The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the

CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%)

When the “EMA

SUP” switch is

“OFF” on the PH-

PC43 (EMA) card.

Not used

“S”

“b”

“y”

2. On-line stand-by CPR

The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates

“S,” “b,” “y”

Not used “0-F”

3. Both active and stand-by CPR

The setting of SENSE switch is indicated.

When the “EMA

SUP” switch is

“ON” on the PH-

PC43 (EMA) card.

Not used

4. Program & Office data load

“1”indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the

memory

“0” indicated during the Office data load

Not used

“F”

“c”

“d”

1. When Program Install

The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three process-

es execute)

“F”indicated during HD format.

“c”indicated when copying data from FD (Basic Software #1) to HD

“d” indicated while making the directory on the HD

Not used “1”

2. When Program Load

After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to

memory.

“1” is indicated during this process.

3Not used “c”“c”indicated when copying the data from FD to HD

5Not used

The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart).

“1”indicated during the Program load.

“0”indicated during the process.

CNot used “H”The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE.

“H”indicated during the ROM data loading.

“1”“0”

Segment Spinning In

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 33

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

5. Switch Settings

[for 1-IMG/4-IMG/IPX-U System]

Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being

accessed.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(PWR) —ON ×PWR is supplied to the CPR.

OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

MB Note

(FDD/HDD) —ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

MBR

(DSP) —ON (Up) Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is

located.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

CPURST

(DSP) —— Execute the CPR processing according to the

SENSE setting.

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

1OFF ×Not used.

2OFF ×Not used.

3OFF ×Not used.

4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.

OFF ×Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.

2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.

3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.

4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.

5~7 OFF ×Fixed to “OFF.”

8ON IPX-U System

OFF 1IMG/4IMG System

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP)

1~8 OFF ×Not used.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 34

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Note: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SENSE

(DSP)

Note

The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

•HD formatted

•File copied from FDD to HD

•Directory created on the HD

2×On-line mode.

3 File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD.

4 Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD.

5OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading

the ROM data.

6 HD format of the FDD/HDD.

C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 35

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

[for IPX-UMG System]

Note: Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being

accessed. This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.

SWITCH NAME SWITC

H NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(PWR) —ON ×PWR is supplied to the CPR.

OFF PWR is not supplied to the CPR.

MB Note

(FDD/HDD) —ON (Up) Make-busy of the FDD/HDD.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

MBR

(DSP) —ON (Up) Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is

located.

OFF (Down) ×Normal setting.

CPURST

(DSP) —— Execute the CPR processing according to the

SENSE setting.

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

1ON ×Fixed to “ON.”

2OFF ×Fixed to “OFF.”

ON High Density system configuration (one LP

controls two IMGs)

OFF ×Standard system configuration (one LP

controls four IMGs)

4ON Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected.

OFF ×Watchdog Timer time-out is detected.

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

1ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF.

2ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF.

3ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF.

4ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON.

OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF.

5~7 OFF ×Fixed to “OFF.”

8ON ×Fixed to “ON.”

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 36

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Note: This switch setting is valid when the “EMA SUP” switch is ON (UP side).

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SYSTEM

SELECT2

(DSP)

1~4 OFF ×Not used.

5~8

Physical PBI Number (Equipment Number)

Note 1: Physical PBI No. must be the same

on the CPR of system #0 and #1 in

dual configuration.

Note 2: This setting is required when the

system applies High Density system

configuration (i.e., a LP controls

two IMGs) only.

SW5 SW6 SW7 SW8 PBI No.

OFF

PBI 02 (SP)

PBI 04 (CMP)

PBI 30 (LP 00)

PBI 38 (LP 04) Note

PBI 40 (LP 08)

PBI 48 (LP 12) Note

PBI 50 (LP 16)

PBI 58 (LP 20) Note

PBI 60 (LP 24)

PBI 68 (LP 28) Note

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 37

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Note: Refer to the following figure and table for the PBI Number and the Equipment Number for IPX-UMG

system. The same PBI Number must be assigned to both #0 and #1 processors in dual configuration.

Processor Name PBI No. CPU Accommodation Equipment No.

SP 02 15

CMP 04 14

LP00 (IMG0) 30 0

LP08 (IMG4) 40 2

LP16 (IMG8) 50 4

LP24 (IMG12) 60 6

CMG

CMP

IMG0

LP00

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

IMG4

LP08

IMG5 IMG6 IMG7

IMG8

LP16

IMG9 IMG10 IMG11

IMG12

LP24

IMG13 IMG14 IMG15

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 38

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

Note 1: The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the

CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch.

Note 2: This switch is used on the CPR mounted in SP only.

Note 3: Connection Hold Restart is proceeded by initializing the system with the TOPU key.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SENSE

(DSP)

Note 1

Note 2 ×On-line mode.

Note 2

The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD.

•HD formatted

•File copied from FDD to HD

•Directory created on the HD

Note 2 File copied from FDD to HD/Connection Hold Restart. Note 3

Note 2 OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading

the ROM data.

Note 2 The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 39

Revision 1.0

SN1695 CPRBF-A

CPU Board

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

(PWR)

(PWR:PZ-PW106)

(FDD/HDD)

MBR

(DSP)

SYSTEM

SELECT0

(DSP)

SYSTEM

SELECT1

(DSP)

SYSTEM SELECT2

(DSP)

SENSE

(DSP)

OFF

12 3 4 ON

1234 ON

56 7 8

1234 ON

56 7 8

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 40

Revision 1.0

PH-GT09

Gate

PH-GT09

Gate

1. General Function

The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. The

CPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT.

Figure 2-9 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System

PLO0

PLO1

TDSW03

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TDSW13

TDSW02

TDSW12

TDSW01

TDSW11

TDSW00

DLKC0

MISC

ISAGT

DSP

CPULANI

LANI

TDSW10

CPR #0

To HUB

ISAGT

DLKC1

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

LANI

EMA

IOC/

MISC

MISC Bus

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 41

Revision 1.0

PH-GT09

Gate

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-10.

Figure 2-10 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module TSWM

GT0

GT1

MBR

OPE/MB

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 42

Revision 1.0

PH-GT09

Gate

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Make-busy of circuit card

DOWN ×Normal setting

MBR

Note

When the ACT side of GT’s MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of

TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When

the TSW is dual configuration.)

DOWN ×Normal setting.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MBR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 43

Revision 1.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

1. General Function

The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface allowing the CPU board to control the TSW,

HSW, and PLO cards in the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW/CMG. This circuit card also is

equipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both systems (single/

dual). This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

Figure 2-11 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-U System

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

(IOGT1)

PH-GT10

(IOGT0)

PH-GT10

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 44

Revision 1.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) for IPX-UMG System

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

P-BUS

LANI

LANI P-BUS

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MMC

MISC

EMA

RES

RES RES

(IOGT1)

PH-GT10

(IOGT0)

PH-GT10

ISAGT ISAGT

ISAGT2 ISAGT2

PCI MEM

PCI BUS PCI BUS

PCI MEM

MISC

I/O

BUS

MISC

I/O

BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS CMP

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 45

Revision 1.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13.

Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT)

Mounting Module ISWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

MBR

OPE/MB

PWRALM

CA4L

COPY

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 46

Revision 1.0

PH-GT10

Input Output Gate

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING

OPE/MB

Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.

OFF This circuit card is in ST-BY state.

Red Lights when this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

PWRALM Red Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal.

CA4L Red Lights when 4 MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty.

COPY Green Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit Card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

MBR UP Make-busy request

DOWN ×Make-busy request cancel

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MBR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 47

Revision 1.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

1. General Function

This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associated

with Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IPX-U/IPX-UMG system,

and 2) distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this pro-

cessing solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL man-

agement even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIM

of any node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration.

For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the “Feature

Programming Manual”.

•Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2]

•Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9]

Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX)

IPX-U System/IPX-UMG System

ATI

(TSW 1) (TSW 1)

(TSW 1)

TSW/HSW 1

DLMX 0

(DLMX 1)

OUT

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

DLKC 0

(DLKC 1)

TSW 0 TSW 0

TSW 0

TSW/HSW 0

LN 0/LMG0 LN 1/LMG1

LN 2/LMG2

LN 3/LMG3

ISW/CMG

Note

: Circuit Card

: Circuit Card (No. 1 System)

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC

: BLF/TGBL data to ATI

(No. 1 system)

: BLF/TGBL data from DLKC

(No. 1 system)

BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible

TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp

Note: IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW/CMG.

OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW/

CMG.

This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM of

LN0/LMG0.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 48

Revision 1.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

2. Mounting Location/Condition

When this circuit card is used in a single configuration.

Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:

1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.

2. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.

3. To used this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ATRK command.

4. Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same

Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where a

DLMX card is mounted).

5. Only one DLMX card can be mounted when the system is composed of single configuration.

When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration.

Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots:

Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows:

1. A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW).

2. This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23).

3. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above.

4. To use this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ATRK command.

5. A maximum two DLMX cards (a pair of DLMX card) can be mounted when the system is a dual

configuration.

PIM

Mounting Module

HW 0 HW 1 HW 2 HW 6 HW 7 HW 8

Highway Block

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23

DLMX

Mounting Condition

PIM

Mounting Module

HW 0 HW 1 HW 2 HW 6 HW 7 HW 8

Highway Block

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

DLMX #0

DLMX #1

Mounting Condition

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 49

Revision 1.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

3. Face Layout of Lamps and Switches

The face layout of lamps and switches is shown below.

Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:

PA-PC94 Lamp Indications Reference

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

ACT Green Lights when this circuit card is in a active state.

OFF Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state.

LOAD OFF Not used.

PWALM Red Lights when OBP alarm

ACT

PWALM

LOAD

MB KEY

OPE

MNT

MODE

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 50

Revision 1.0

PA-PC94

Data Link Multiplexer

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel

MNT

0OFF×Fixed to OFF.

1OFF×Fixed to OFF.

2OFF×Fixed to OFF.

3ON Make-busy-request.

OFF Cancel the make-busy-request.

MODE 0×Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection)

1-7 Not used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MNT

MODE

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 51

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -

48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in

the PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be

selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone

circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-A ( PWR) PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 52

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module PIM

(PA-PW54-A)

DPWR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 53

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

SW4

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW54

-A

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

25A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 54

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48V SW —ON ×–48 V input power is supplied.

OFF –48 V input power is not supplied.

RESET —PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting.

MB —ON Make-busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting.

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 55

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-A

Dual Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SW4 20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

ON 12

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 56

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.

The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card

in the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and

voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a

Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-B ( PWR) PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 57

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slot.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

DPWR

(PA-PW54-B)

PIM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 58

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-19.

Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

SW4

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW54

- B

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

20A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 59

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48V SW —ON ×–48V input power is supplied.

OFF –48V input power is not supplied.

RESET —PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting

MB —ON Make busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 60

Revision 1.0

PA-PW54-B

Dual Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW4 20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

ON 12

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 61

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

PA-PW55-A

Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48

V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the

associated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage

can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler

Tone circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-A (PWR) PA-PW54-A (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 62

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR

(PA-PW55-A)

PIM

Mounting Module PIM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 63

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.

Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

SW4

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW55

-A

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

25A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 64

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48 V SW ON ×–48 V input power is supplied.

OFF –48 V input power is not supplied.

RESET PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting

MB —ON Make-busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 65

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-A

Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW4 20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 66

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

PA-PW55-B

Power

1. General Function

The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM.

The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card

in the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output

frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card.

In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card.

Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card in the System

Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) .

HOW (For LC)

CR (For LC)

+5V, +12V, -5V

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

PA-PW55-B (PWR) PA-PW54-B (DPWR)

-48 V (For LC, TRK)

DC-DC

RGU

HOW

SUB

PWR

REL

NFB

-48 V

+80V (Option) Note

+80 V (For MWL)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 67

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following slots.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR

(PA-PW55-B)

PIM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 68

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-23.

Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card

-48V SW

FUSE

SIDE VIEW

FRONT VIEW

PA-

PW55

-B

5.0

0.5

RGUOUT

0.5A

125V

AC/DC

+80VOUT

125V

AC/DC

-48VOUT

25A

AC250V

DC125V

RST

-48V

INPUT

-48V

SW -48V

CONN

20A

+80V ON

-48V ON

RGU ON

DC ON

OPE

DC ALM

CPU ALM

RGU ALM

HOW ALM

( )

SW4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 69

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

This circuit card has the following switches.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

+80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied.

–48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied.

RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress.

DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally.

OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible.

CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated.

DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm.

RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm.

HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

No. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

–48V SW ON ×–48V input power is supplied.

OFF –48V input power is not supplied.

RESET PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card.

—×Normal setting

MB —ON Make busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW4

1ON Frequency of Ringing Signal :25 [Hz]

OFF ×Frequency of Ringing Signal :20 [Hz]

2ON ×Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms]

OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms]

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 70

Revision 1.0

PA-PW55-B

Power

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

–48 V

RESET

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW4 20 [Hz]

90 [Vrms]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 71

Revision 1.0

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

1. General Function

The main functions of the PH-DK10 card are as follows:

(a) to send out the system operating status, alarm and clock information to the Display Panel.

(b) to collect the MJ/MN/SUP alarm information occurs on CMG and each LMG. In addition, by the

collected internal alarm information, this card controls the Audible and Visual Alarm Indicating

Panel.

(d) to send out the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal from this card on the CMG to each LP.

Additionally, this card activates the communication between the processor in each LP and CMP, SP.

This circuit card is used in the IPX-UMG system.

Refer to the next page for the location of this circuit card within the system.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 72

Revision 1.0

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

Figure 2-24 Location of PH-DK10 (DSPC)

RELAY

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-M22

CMP

ISEL

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-DK10

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-M22

SEL

AUDIBLE

AND

VISUAL

ALARM

INDICATING

PANEL

DISPLAY

PANEL

(DSPP)

RELAY

LMG

CMG

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-M22

RELAY

LMG

RELAY

KEY INFORMATION

ALM INFORMATION

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 73

Revision 1.0

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in slot No.00 on SP of CMG.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-DK10 (DSPC)

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04

DSPC

CPRAS-A

OPE/MB

To MMC on

LPR (CMP/LP)

To PZ-DK222

on the TOPU

of CMG

CN7

CN8

CN6

CN5

CN4

CN3

CN2

CN1

CN0

KEY

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 74

Revision 1.0

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB Green Lights when this circuit card is in operation.

Red Lights when this circuit card is in Make Busy state.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit Card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 75

Revision 1.0

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

6. External Interface

Figure 2-26 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel

01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05

6-BELL

8-MNA

9-SUPA

10-MJA

33-MNB

34-SUPB

35-MJB

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

MDF

MJ/MN/BELL

-48V

(RPT0)

(RPT1)

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL

ALARM INDICATING PANEL

MDF MJ

BELL

(BASEU)

MISC0A

Connector

RPT Terminal on front

of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

DSPC (PH-DK10) : Slot No.00

68PH DSPALM CA

Installation Cable

Connected

to DSPP

68PH DSPALM CA and

Installation Cable

68PH Connector Champ Connector

MPALM

SUPA1

EXTA

MNA1

BELL0

MJA1

SUPB1

MNB1

BELL1

MJB1

SUPA0

MJA0

MNA0 MNB0

SUPB0

MJB0

MPALM

SUPB

MJB

MNB MNA

BELL

SUPA

MJA

68PH DSPALM CA

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 76

Revision 1.0

PH-DK10

Display Panel Controller

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 77

Revision 1.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

1. General Function

The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C,

between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station Message

Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI), Property Management System

(PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is in

dual configuration.

Note: Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

Figure 2-27 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card in the System

CPU

BOARD

FDD/HDD #0

GT #1 GT #0

MISC

EMA

MISC/IOC

IOC

CPU

I/O

BOARD

MISC I/O BUS

FDD/HDD #1

I/O

(RS-232C) x4 posts for MAT, SMDR, MCI, PMS, PRT

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 78

Revision 1.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The IOC cards can be placed in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below.

Note: Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-28.

Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card

00 01 02 03 04

Mounting Module LPM

IOC#1

IOC#0

OPE

IOC ALM

PORT0

SW50

MBR

PORT1

PORT2

PORT3

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 79

Revision 1.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

4. Lamp Indications

The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.

5. Switch Settings

The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard

setting, it is indicated with “×” in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE/MB Green This circuit card is operating normally.

Red This circuit card is placed in the Make-busy state.

IOC ALM Red Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor.

PORT0 - PORT3 RS-232C signal status indication. n = port number (0-3)

SDn Green SD: Send Data

RDn Green RD: Receive Data

ERn Green ER: Equipment Ready

DRn Green DR: Data Ready

CDn Green CD: Carrier Detect

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

MB Up The circuit card is placed into Make-busy status.

Down ×Cancellation of Make-busy.

MBR Up The circuit card is placed into Make-busy request status.

Down ×Cancellation of Make-busy Request.

SW50

1ON This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1.

OFF This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0.

2ON Not used (For Business System Only).

OFF ×

2ON Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only).

OFF ×Free Wheeling.

3ON Not used.

OFF ×

4ON Not used.

OFF ×

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 80

Revision 1.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

6. External Interface

As illustrated in Figure 2-29, the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A cable is required to connect external equipment

such as the MAT, SMDR, MCI, and PRT.

Figure 2-29 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC)

Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below.

The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting

slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below.

The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or

whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the

connecting cables is explained in the “Installation Procedure

Manual”.

MISC 3B/2B (Note 1)

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

Backplane

PH-IO24

(IOC)

Circuit #0

Circuit #1

Circuit #2

Circuit #3

RS-232C cable (Note 2)

68PH S 2PORTS CA-A

MISC 3A/2A (Note 1)

ST2

ST1

PB/CI

04 CS

03 RS

02 RD

01 SD

Pin Signal name

TYP0, 1 Connector

AMP AMP

TYP0 TYP1 TYP1TYP0

To RS-232C

Terminal

TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation

Note 1:

Note 2:

Mounting Slot

IOC Circuit Number

#0, #1

#2, #3

#0, #1

#2, #3

MISC 2B

MISC 2A

MISC 3B

MISC 3A

MISC Connector

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 81

Revision 1.0

PH-IO24

Input/Output Controller

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MBR

SW50

Meaning of SW50-1:

ON: This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card.

OFF: This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card.

2 3 4

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 82

Revision 1.0

PH-M22

MMC

PH-M22

MMC

1. General Function

The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are as follows:

•to collect key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/the

other LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW. (for IPX-U system)

•to collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPU

display. (for IPX-U system)

•to send out the key information to EMA within the same LMG (for IPX-UMG system)

•to collect the external MJ/MN alarm information output by EMA in each LMG (for IPX-UMG system)

This circuit card is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-U System

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

PZ-DK227

(TOP KEY)

PH-PC40

PH-M22

EMA

RELAY

RECEIVER

ISEL

ISW

AUDIBLE

AND

VISUAL

ALARM

INDICATING

PANEL

KEY INFORMATION

ALM INFORMATION

SEL

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 83

Revision 1.0

PH-M22

MMC

Figure 2-31 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) in IPX-UMG System

RELAY

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-M22

CMP

ISEL

PZ-DK222

(TOP KEY)

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-DK10

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-M22

SEL

AUDIBLE

AND

VISUAL

ALARM

INDICATING

PANEL

DISPLAY

PANEL

(DSPP)

RELAY

LMG

CMG

RECEIVER

EMA

PH-PC43

PH-M22

RELAY

LMG

RELAY

KEY INFORMATION

ALM INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 84

Revision 1.0

PH-M22

MMC

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-32.

Figure 2-32 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC)

00 01 02 03 04

LPM/CMP/LP

Mounting Module

MMC

CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A

OPE

CN7

CN6

CN5

CN4

CN3

CN2

CN1

CN0

KEY

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 85

Revision 1.0

PH-M22

MMC

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in operation.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit Card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit Card Make-busy cancel

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 86

Revision 1.0

PH-M22

MMC

6. External Interface

Figure 2-33 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel

Note: External connection for Alarm Indicator is not used in IPX-UMG system.

01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05

MPALM

EXTAA

BELAA

MNAA

SUPAA

MJAA

MNBA

SUPBA

MJBA

BELAA

MNAA

SUPAA

MJAA

MNBA

SUPBA

MJBA

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

MDF

MJ/MN/BELL

-48V

(RPT0)

(RPT1)

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL

ALARM INDICATING PANEL

MDF MJ

BELL

(BASEU)

LPM

MISC0A

Connector

RPT Terminal on front

of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00

68PH EXMISC CA

68PH EXMISC CA and

Installation Cable

68PH EXMISC CA

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 87

Revision 1.0

PH-M22

MMC

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MB Note: Normal operating mode is down.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 88

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

PH-M16

Line Test

1. General Function

This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports

sending Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones,

and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.

Note: A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/

automatic trunk test at the same time is only one.

Figure 2-34 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) Card Within the System

TSW

TEL

PIM

LPRA

LTST

TEST

EQ GT

EXGT

CPU

EXTENDED I/O BUS

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 89

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below:

Note: IPX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02.

IPX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC)

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-35.

Figure 2-35 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card

Note: CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

LPM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04

PH-M16

OPE/MB

SW0

CRIN

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 90

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

4. Lamp Indications

5. Switch Settings

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE/MB Green This circuit card is operating in normal mode.

Red This circuit card is Make-busy.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SW0

1ON ×Setting of a condition of DT detection

(440Hz+350Hz)

2ON ×Setting of a condition of RBT detection

(440Hz+480Hz)

3ON Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67 msec.)

OFF ×Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133 msec.)

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with

sending test tone of ODT

(Set soft control or E-wire loop-back)

OFF

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with

sending test tone of ODT

(Set soft control only)

BASIC INTERVAL TIMER

SW0

5678TIME

ON OFF OFF OFF 8µ

ON ON OFF OFF 16µ

ON ON ON OFF 32µ

ON ON ON ON 64µ

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 91

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

6. External Interface

Figure 2-36 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

00 01 02 03 04

PH-M16

Circuit Card Backboard Connector

Connector Name

Slot Number

LPM

LPM Backboard

MISC Circuit Card Backboard Connector

MISC CONNECTOR

68PH EXMISC CABLE

MISC Connector Accommodation

TELB

LCB

THOWB

THOWS

INB

TELA

LCA

THOWA

ONHK

INA

SE TCR

ATM

ATAATB OUTAOUTB TA1TB1

MISC CONNECTOR

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 92

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

Figure 2-36 Connecting Route Diagram

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW0

OUTA

INA

INB

TA1

TB1

LTST

TLT

PBX MDP

ON (MB)

OFF

ON 2 3 45678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 93

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

1. General Function

The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In between

the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interface

for PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, this

circuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

information and digital data information.

Figure 2-37 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System

MUX

CPR

LC/TRK

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 94

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

Figure 2-38 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 3

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 2

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 1

TDSW

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

Line/Trunk PM

IMG 0

GT 1

GT 0

CPR 1

ISAGT

CPR 0

ISAGT

DLKC 1

DLKC 0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 95

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

Figure 2-39 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

MUX00

LC/TRK

DLKC0

LC/TRK

MUX01

MUX02

MUX03

MUX10

MUX11

MUX12

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

TSW01 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

PLO 0

DLKC1

PLO 1

MUX MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

LN/LMG

ISWM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 96

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

The PCM highway running is illustrated in Figure 2-40. There are sixteen 2 Mbps PCM highways (HW0 -

HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance,

highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of the

Group number 0, 1, 2 and 3.

Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the group numbers 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Group

number 24 and 25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM).

All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway × 16 highways

= 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSW

circuit card across the 32.786 Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS).

Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/

trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX.

In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuits

of 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in Time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23).

Figure 2-40 PCM Highway Running

MUX#1

MUX#0

HW6

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PWR

1011

12131415

16171819

20212223

1415

1617

(24)

(25)

2627

2829

31 30

2627

2829

3031

HW0 HW1 HW2

HW3 HW4

HW5

HW8 HW9 HW10

HW12

HW7

HW14

HW15

Slot number of the PIM U-A

Group (G) number of the LENS

8 circuits of CFTs

Group 24 and 25 are used

for the SPM 2 Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway

HW13HW11

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 97

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

2. Mounting Location/Condition

For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3.

For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-41.

Figure 2-41 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module PIM

MUX #0

MUX #1

SW01

OFFON

MUXACT

SYNC

RCLK ALM

PMCLK ALM

CFT OPE

MUX

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 98

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

MUX ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

SYNC Green Lights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the

MUX and TSW.

RCLK ALM Red Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred.

PMCLK ALM Red

Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred.

•2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks)

•Frame Head signal

•4 Mbps clock signals

CFT OPE Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW01

1ON 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid.

OFF 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid.

2ON Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block.

OFF ×Setting µ-Law in the CFT function block.

3OFF ×Not used.

4OFF ×Not used.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 99

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

6. External Interface

For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-42.

Figure 2-42 External Interface for PH-PC36

TSW

MUX

#0 MUX

MUX

TSW

MT24 TSW CA-180

MT24 TSW CA-140

MT24 TSW CA-90

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 100

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are illustrated in Figure 2-43. As seen in this illustration,

the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the “MUX###” connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB)

of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for more details.

Figure 2-43 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36(MUX)

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy

IMG3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy/APM

IMG2

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

TSWM

IMG1

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM

IMG0

PIM

BWB of TSWM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 101

Revision 1.0

PH-PC36

Multiplexer

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

1ON

2 3 4

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 102

Revision 1.0

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

1. General Function

This circuit card simultaneously provides all Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1-IMG

system) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT calls, or

the station idle/busy information through the TSW system link.

Figure 2-44 Location of PC-PH20 in the System

Note: MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by the

DLKC.

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

DLKC0 DLKC1

GT1

ISAGT1ISAGT0

CPU0 CPU1

GT0

ATTCON

TSW

ISA BUS

MISC I/O BUS

Note

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module TSWM

DLKC#0

DLKC#1

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 103

Revision 1.0

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-45.

Figure 2-45 Face Layout of the PC-PH20 Card

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB

Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state.

Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is

abnormal.

PWR ALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

OPE/MB

PWR ALM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 104

Revision 1.0

PH-PC20

Data Link Controller

No cable connections are required.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 105

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

1. General Function

The PH-PC45 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, and

sends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate the

system MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of the

CPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Hold

sending function, too.

Figure 2-46 Location of PH-PC45 (EMA) Card in the System

DSP

CPU

CPR #0

EMA

IOC

MISC

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus

MISC Bus # 0 MISC Bus # 1

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 106

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PH-PC45 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-47.

Figure 2-47 Face Layout of the PH-PC45 (EMA) Card

Mounting Module LPM

LPM

PH-IO24 (IOC)

PH-PC40 (EMA)

00 01 02 03 04

OPE/MB

ACT1

CKERR1

ACT0

EMASUP

CPU SEL

NMI SEL

CKERR0

SW65

SW62

SW73

SW70

SW92

SW A0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 107

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: Set CPUSEL switch downward, if a single CPU system.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE/MB Green Indicates the circuit card is operating normally.

Red Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state.

ACT1 Green CPU #1 is in the ACT state.

CKERR 1 Red CPU #1 clock failure has occurred.

ACT0 Green CPU #0 is in the ACT state.

CKERR 0 Red CPU #0 clock failure has occurred.

EMSUP Green Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .)

OFF Enable to the CPU change-over.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Make-busy of the circuit card.

DOWN Normal setting.

EMASUP UP Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit.

DOWN ×Normal setting.

CPUSEL

UP Forced activating the CPU #1.

MIDDLE ×Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note

DOWN Forced activating the CPU #0.

NMISEL UP Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU when

a fault occurs.

DOWN ×Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 108

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW62

1ON Power Shut Down (PSDN) function

(used in Australia only)

OFF ×

2ON

OFF ×

3ON

OFF ×

4ON

OFF ×

SW65

1ON ×Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when this

circuit card is used in the one frame stack configuration).

OFF CPU-ACT Signal does not output.

2ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

3ON Dual CPU configuration.

OFF Single CPU configuration.

4ON ×PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the

TOPU.

OFF PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU.

SW70

1ON External music on hold source (FM lead) is used.

OFF Internal music on hold source IC is used.

2ON Output the alarm information for the external indicator

(used in Australia only).

OFF ×Alarm information does not output.

SW73

1ON ×Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid.

OFF PFT control is invalid.

2ON ×µ-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

OFF A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music.

SW62 ON OFF

SW62-1 IMG#0 valid IMG0# invalid

SW62-2 IMG#1 valid IMG1# invalid

SW62-3 IMG#2 valid IMG2# invalid

SW62-4 IMG#3 valid IMG3# invalid

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 109

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

Note: SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW92

Note

SWA0

Note

1MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF.

4ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this

circuit card.

8ON Not used

OFF ×Not used

SW92-1 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW92-1 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Don’t care OFF ON Buzzer

Don’t care ON OFF Chime

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 110

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

6. External Interface

External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the external

equipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-48.

Figure 2-48 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold

01 02 03 04 0501 02 03 04 05

MJB

MNA

FM0

FM1

MPALM

MJA

MNA

BELL

50 EXTA EXTB

16PH EXALM CA FM0

MJA

MNA

BELL

MJB

MNB

RPT1(G)

RPT0(-48V)

CABLING DIAGRAM

CROSS CONNECTION

MDF EXTERNAL

MUSIC

SOURCE

MJ/MN/BELL

-48V

(RPT0)

(RPT1)

AUDIBLE AND VISUAL

ALARM INDICATING PANEL

MDF MJ

BELL

EALM Connector

EMA

(Slot No.04)

16PH EXALM CA

(BASEU)

LPM Installation

Cable

RPT Terminal on front

of the BASEU

REAR VIEW

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 111

Revision 1.0

PH-PC45

Emergency Alarm Controller

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

EMA-SUP

CPU-SEL

NMI-SEL

SWA0

SW62

SW65

SW70

SW73

SW92

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

1 2 3 4 ON

1234ON

1 2 ON

12ON

1234ON

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 112

Revision 1.0

PH-PW14

Power Switch

PH-PW14

Power Switch

1. General Function

This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mounted

in the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5 V, -5

V, and +12 V to MISC slots.

The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant.

Figure 2-49 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram

Con-

troller Con-

troller

DC-

DC DC-

Load

-48V

-48V IN

Switch

FUSE FUSE

PWR SW #0

FET Switch PWR SW #1

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 113

Revision 1.0

PH-PW14

Power Switch

2. Mounting Location/Conditions

This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01).

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-50.

Figure 2-50 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module TSWM/ISWM

PWR SW#0

PWR SW#1

P-ON

ALM

-48V in Fuse

(125V AC/DC 15A)

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 114

Revision 1.0

PH-PW14

Power Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

P-ON Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

ALM Red Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW ON ×The card supplies the operating power to various circuit

cards.

OFF

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

01 SW -48 V operating power is supplied to vari-

ous circuit cards.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 115

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

1. General Function

This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT.

The TSW capacity is 2048×2048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IPX

configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port

Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS.

Figure 2-51 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System

[Connection diagram of the TSW]

MUX

CPR

LC/TRK

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

[Function block diagram]

PLO

MUX

LV D S

CFT

From EMA

TSW

INT

MUSIC

DTI DCS

MUX

LC/TRK

PH-SW10

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 116

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-52 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO).

Figure 2-52 PLO Function Diagram

When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required,

and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. When

the system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (±5 ppm deviation) can be the

base clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the

digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another

clock source automatically in the order of:

1. DCS0

2. DCS1

3. DIU0

4. DIU1

5. DIU2

6. DIU3

7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator

TSW#1

(PH-SW10)

TSW#0 (PH-SW10)

TSW

PLO

OSC#1 (PA-CK14)

OSC#0 (PA-CK14)

DCS 0 DCS 1

DCS 1

DCS 0

DIU 0

DIU 1

DIU 2

DIU 3

Multiple connection on MDF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 117

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH (for wireless module).

The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and it

sends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3.

This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. The

TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from the

EMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as a

tone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed down

connection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.)

Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eight

circuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk.

Figure 2-53 Voice Prompting

[Voice Prompt sending for Tone] [Voice Prompt sending for Music]

Speech Path MemorySpeech Path Memory

TONE ROM MUSIC from EMA

Tone source selected by office data Music source selected by office data

[Time Slot for Speech Path Memory]

[SPM for music channel 16-29]

MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5

[SPM for music channel 0-15]

MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7

[SPM for Tone channel 16-31]

MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7

[SPM for Tone channel 0-15]

MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7

MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM0

Tone Music

Note

Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 118

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in PIM number zero (0) of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-54.

Figure 2-54 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module PIM

PIM0

TSW #1

TSW #0

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW11

TSWACT

MUXACT

PLOACT

TSWMBR

PLOMB

M3SY

M2SY

M1SY

M0SY

CFT

SYNC

ICK

ECK

SW03

SW04

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

PMCA

PMJ

PMN

SW12

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 119

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

TSWACT

Green Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.

Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.

Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.

MUXACT Green Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state.

PLOACT Green Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state.

M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.

M2SY Green Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established.

M1SY Green Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established.

M0SY Green Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established.

PMCA Red Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred.

CFT Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid.

PMJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure

•8 KHz output FH failure

•5 msec × “n” output FH failure

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•Both internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm

deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office

PMN Yellow

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm) failure

•High-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm) failure

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 120

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SYNC

Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

OFF

Remains off when any of the following have occurred.

•DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•Drifting failure

ICK Green

Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally.

Note 1: The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit is

operational.

ECK Green

Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card

(PA-CK14).

Note 2: The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

TSWMBR UP TSW Make-busy request.

DOWN ×TSW Make-busy request cancel.

PLOMBR UP PLO Make-busy request.

DOWN ×PLO Make-busy request cancel.

SW12 1-F 1 Fixed to “1.”

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 121

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

Note: When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a con-

nection to TSW (Don’t use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LED

is not lit. In this mode, only SW03 is valid.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW03

1ON 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid.

OFF 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid.

2ON Setting of A-law in the CFT function block.

OFF ×Setting of µ-law in the CFT function block.

3OFF ×Fixed.

ON Only MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM

1/2/3). Note

OFF ×TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted in

PIM 0).

SW04

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 122

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

1ON PLO operates as the clock subordinate office.

OFF PLO operates as the clock source office.

2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

6ON This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5 m

Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

7ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE”)

OFF ×(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF”)

8OFF ×Not used

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 123

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

6. External Interface

When this circuit card is used in “clock subordinate office,” clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must be

extracted. See Figure 2-56 for more information. When this circuit card is used in “clock source office,”

cable connections are not necessary.

Figure 2-55 PLO Connector Leads Location

DCSB0

DIU0B0

DIU1B0

DIU2B0

DIU3B0

SYN0B0

SYN1B0

DCSB1

DIU0B1

DIU1B1

DIU2B1

DIU3B1

SYN0B1

SYN1B1

DCSA0

DIU0A0

DIU1A0

DIU2A0

DIU3A0

SYN0A0

SYN1A0

DCSA1

DIU0A1

DIU1A1

DIU2A1

DIU3A1

SYN0A1

SYN1A1

Mounting Module PIM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 124

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-56 Connecting Route Diagram

DCS

TSW #1

TSW #0

/PRT

CCT/DTI

/PRT

CCT/DTI

/PRT

CCT/DTI

/PRT

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

DCSA0

DCSB0

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DCSA1

DCSB1

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

PBX MDF

Note: The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB),

DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC).

DIU3B0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 125

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-57.

Figure 2-57 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10

TSW

MUX

#0 MUX

MUX

TSW

MT24 TSW CA-180

MT24 TSW CA-140

MT24 TSW CA-90

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 126

Revision 1.0

PH-SW10

Time Division Switch

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

TSWMBR

PLOMB

SW03

SW04

SW11

SW12

1 2 3 4 ON

5 6 7 8

12 3 4 ON

5678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 127

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

1. General Function

This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSW

card is capable of 8192 × 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cards

allow 8192 × 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration.

The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administers the Port Microprocessor

(PM) for line/trunk circuit cards.

Figure 2-58 TSW Configuration

TSW

(8Kx2K)

TSW

(8Kx2K)

TSW

(8Kx2K)

TSW

(8Kx2K)

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

[TSW configuration]

[INT configuration]

CPU1(LP) ISAGT1 GT1

CPU0(LP) ISAGT0 GT0

TSW1

(INT)

TSW0

(INT)

MUX01

MUX30

MUX31

MUX00 LC/TRK(PM)

LC/TRK(PM)

ISA BUS I/O BUS

System #1

System #0

ACT

STBY

ACT ACT

ACT

PM BUS

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 128

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, Ring

Back Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, is

located on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card.

Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot of

PCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot.

Figure 2-59 Music/Tone Insertion

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW00

PLO#0

TONE ROM

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW1

PLO#1

TONE ROM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 129

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-60 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IPX-U system accommodates two

TSWMs (TSWM0/1).

PIM 3

[SPM for music channel 16-29]

MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5

PIM 2

[SPM for music channel 0-15]

MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

PIM 1

[SPM for tone channel 16-31]

MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

PIM0

[SPM for tone channel 0-15]

MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7

MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7

Note :

Note

MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module TSWM

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 02

TSW 03

TSW 10

TSW 11

TSW 12

TSW 13

TSWM

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 130

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

The definitions for the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below.

•4-IMG System

•IPX-U system

This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IPX-U system.

•For the card in TSWM0

SYMBOL SYSTEM CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

IMG 0

TSW01 IMG 1

TSW02 IMG 2

TSW03 IMG 3

TSW10

IMG 0

TSW11 IMG 1

TSW12 IMG 2

TSW13 IMG 3

SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

Collects the PCM data IMG 0

TSW01 IMG 1

TSW02 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 0

TSW03 IMG 1

TSW10

Collects the PCM data IMG 0

TSW11 IMG 1

TSW12 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 0

TSW13 IMG 1

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 131

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

•For the card in TSWM1

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-61.

Figure 2-61 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW)

SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION CONTROLLED IMG

TSW00

Collects the PCM data IMG 2

TSW01 IMG 3

TSW02 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 2

TSW03 IMG 3

TSW10

Collects the PCM data IMG 2

TSW11 IMG 3

TSW12 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 2

TSW13 IMG 3

TSWMBR

TSWACT

M3SY

M2SY

M1SY

M0SY

PLO 1

PLO 0

TONE

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 132

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

TSWACT

Green Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state.

Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state.

Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side.

M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established.

M2SY Green Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established.

M1SY Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established.

M0SY Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established.

PLO 1 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1.

PLO 0 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

TSWMBR UP TSW Make-busy request.

DOWN ×TSW Make-busy request cancel.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

TONE

1OFF ×Fixed.

2ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE.”)

OFF ×(The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF.”)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 133

Revision 1.0

PH-SW12

Time Division Switch

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

TSWMBR

TONE

1 2 ON

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 134

Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

1. General Function

The PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function for

the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PU-

SW00/PU-SW00-A cards and two PU-SW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS)

switching for four (4) LNs/LMGs. This circuit card is located in ISWM of the ISW/CMG.

Figure 2-62 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)

MUX00

LC/TRK

DLKC0

LC/TRK

MUX01

MUX02

MUX03

MUX10

MUX11

MUX12

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

TSW01 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

PLO 0

DLKC1

PLO 1

MUX MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

[TSW Configuration]

2M PCM HW x8

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32M SERIAL HW

64KHz

Clock

64KHz

Clock

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 135

Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-U System

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

[INT Configuration]

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 136

Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

Figure 2-63 Location of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW) for IPX-UMG System

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MMC

MISC

EMA

RES

RES RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT ISAGT

ISAGT2 ISAGT2

MISC

I/O

BUS

MISC

I/O

BUS

ISAGT BUS

P-BUS

ISAGT BUS

P-BUS

CMP

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

[INT Configuration]

PCI MEM

PCI BUS PCI BUS

PCI MEM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 137

Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-64.

Figure 2-64 Face Layout of PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A (TSW)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module ISWM

TSW (00)

TSW (01)

TSW (02)

TSW (03)

TSW (10)

TSW (11)

TSW (12)

TSW (13)

TSW MB

TSW MBR

TSWACT

1234

PWPALM

HCKALM

LN33

LN32

LN31

LN30

LN23

LN22

LN21

LN20

LN13

LN12

LN11

LN10

LN03

LN02

LN01

LN00

SWE5

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 138

Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

TSWACT Green Lights when the TDSW block is active.

Red Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state.

PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal.

HCKALM Red Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card.

LN33 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN32 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN31 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN30 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN23 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN22 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN21 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN20 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN13 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN12 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN11 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN10 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN03 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN02 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN01 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

LN00 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN/LMG.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 139

Revision 1.0

PU-SW00/PU-SW00-A

Time Division Switch

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

TSW MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

TSW MBR UP Circuit card Make-busy request.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy request cancel.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SWE5

1ON ×LN (Local Node)/LMG (Local Module Group) connection mode.

OFF MUX connection mode.

2OFF ×Not used.

3OFF ×Not used.

4OFF ×Not used.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

TSW MB

TSW MBR

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 140

Revision 1.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

1. General Function

The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, supports the following

functions.

(a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the

space division is composed with this circuit card.

(b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one

card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards.

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW)

MUX00

LC/TRK

DLKC0

LC/TRK

MUX01

MUX02

MUX03

MUX10

MUX11

MUX12

MUX13

TSW00 TSW10

TSW01 TSW11

TSW02 TSW12

TSW03 TSW13

PLO 0

DLKC1

PLO 1

MUX MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

HSW01

HSW10

HSW11

TSW10

TSW11

TSW12

TSW13

2M PCM HW x8

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32M SERIAL HW

64KHz

Clock

64KHz

Clock

32M TSW

Matrix HW

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock

DCS

32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock

[TSW Configuration]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 141

Revision 1.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-U System

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

[INT Configuration]

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 142

Revision 1.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

Figure 2-65 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) for IPX-UMG System

ISAGT2 ISAGT2

PCI MEM

PCI BUS PCI BUS

PCI MEM

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MMC

MISC

EMA

RES

RES RES

IOGT1

IOGT0

ISAGT ISAGT

MISC

I/O

BUS

MISC

I/O

BUS

ISAGT BUS

P-BUS

ISAGT BUS

P-BUS

CMP

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

[INT Configuration]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 143

Revision 1.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW/CMG. The mounted slots are the shaded parts

shown below.

3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-66.

Figure 2-66 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Mounting Module ISWM

HSW (00)

HSW (01)

HSW (10)

HSW (11)

HSWACT

PWRALM

CKALF

CKALE

CKALD

CKALC

CKALB

CKALA

CKAL9

CKAL8

CKAL7

CKAL6

CKAL5

CKAL4

CKAL3

CKAL2

CKAL1

CKAL0

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 144

Revision 1.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

HSWACT Green Lights when the HSW block is active.

Red Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state.

PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal.

CKALF Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALE Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALD Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALC Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALB Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKALA Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL9 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL8 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL7 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL6 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL5 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL4 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 145

Revision 1.0

PU-SW01

Highway Switch

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

No cable connections are required.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

CKAL3 Green Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL2 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL1 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

CKAL0 Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISWM.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 146

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in the

TSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR

to control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this

circuit card onto the CPR.

Figure 2-67 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PLO0

PLO1

TSW03

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TDSW I/O

Local Bus

TSW13

TSW02

TSW12

TSW01

TSW11

TSW00

DLKC0

MISC

ISAGT

DSP

CPULANI

LANI

TSW10

CPR #0

To HUB

ISAGT

DLKC1

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

LANI

EMA

IOC/

MISC

MISC I/O Bus MISC I/O Bus

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 147

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IPX-U System (ISW)

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-69.

Figure 2-69 External Interface for PZ-GT13

HSW01

HSW00

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

HSW11

HSW10

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

RES

CPU CPU

MISC

IOC

EMA

RES

RES RES

(IOGT1)

PH-GT10

(IOGT0)

PH-GT10

(ISAGT)

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT13

MISC I/O BUS

ISAGT BUSISAGT BUS LPM

TSW I/O BUSTSW I/O BUS

ISWM

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

LPM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 148

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT13

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-70. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.

Figure 2-70 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

4. External Interface

This card has no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

FRONT VIEW

ISA BUS INTERFACE

CONN

PMG

DSPP

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 149

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, which

permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industry Standard

Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR.

Figure 2-71 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

DSP

CPU

LANI

CPR#0

DSP

ISAGT CPU LANI

LANI

EMA

IOC/

MISC

TSW TSW

To HUB To HUB

I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus

CPR#1

MISC Bus MISC Bus

ISAGT

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 150

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-72.

Figure 2-72 External Interface for PZ-GT16

PZ-GT16 (GT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

LPM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 151

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT16

Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-73. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.

Figure 2-73 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT)

4. Lamp Indications

This card contains no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

FRONT VIEW

ISA BUS INTERFACE

CONN

PMG

DSPP

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 152

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus

located on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW,

MUX cards of IMG2, 3/6, 7/10, 11/14, 15 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is used

for the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

Figure 2-74 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

LANI

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

PLO 1

PLO 0

CPU#0 CPU#1

EMA

MMC

PH-GT09

(IOGT1)

PH-GT09

(IOGT0)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-GT20

(ISAGT) PZ-GT20

(ISAGT)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

ISA BUS

LPM (IMG0/4/8/12)

GT-BUS

TSWM#1 (IMG2/6/10/14)

TSWM#0 (IMG1/5/9/13)

TSW03

TSW02

TSW01

TSW00

TSW13

TSW12

TSW11

TSW10

CLK 1

CLK 0

PH-GT09

(IOGT1)

PH-GT09

(IOGT0)

TSW I/O BUS

IOC/

MISC

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 153

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-75.

Figure 2-75 External Interface for PZ-GT20

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-76. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card.

Figure 2-76 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19/PC22 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27/28 (FDD/HDD)

LP(IMG0/4/8/12)Mounting Module

Note: FDD/HDD is not mounted on the CPR of LP in IPX-UMG system.

ISA BUS INTERFACE

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 154

Revision 1.0

PZ-GT20

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

4. External Interface

This card contains no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 155

Revision 1.0

PZ-M565

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

PZ-M565

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

1. General Function

This circuit card has the relay functions as mentioned below:

(a) to receive the NMI (Non-Maskable Interruption) signal from the PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card, then

output it to ISA Bus.

(b) to receive the ACT signal from the EMA card, then output it to PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card.

This card is used in IPX-UMG system connecting the two cards on CPU#0 and #1 in CMP with a bus cable.

Figure 2-77 Location of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card in the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-M565 (ISAGT) card is mounted in PCI Slot No.05 on CPU Board within the CMP of IPX-UMG

system as shown in Figure 2-78.

Figure 2-78 External Interface for PZ-M565

CMP

EMA

MISC

DSPC

/MMC

PZ-M565

(ISAGT2)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

LANI

LANI CPU#0

PCI

MEM

ISA BUS

PZ-M565

(ISAGT2)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

LANI

CPU#1

ISA BUS

PCI BUSPCI BUS PCI

MEM

5.0

CMP-CPR

PCI bus ISA bus

PZ-PW92

DC-40V -58.6

SW ON

OFF

ALM

PALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

125V

AC/DC

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PZ-M565

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 156

Revision 1.0

PZ-M565

Industry Standard Architecture Gateway

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors is shown below.

Figure 2-79 Face Layout of PZ-M565 (ISAGT) Card

4. Lamp Indications

This card contains no lamps.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX 2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

CONN

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 157

Revision 1.0

PZ-ME44

PCI Memory

PZ-ME44

PCI Memory

1. General Function

Mounted on CPU Board of CMP in IPX-UMG system, this circuit card provides the Memory Copy

function related to ACT/ST-BY system changeover.

Figure 2-80 Location of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card in the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) card is mounted in PCI Slot No. 02 on CPU Board of CMP as shown in Figure

2-81.

Figure 2-81 External Interface for PZ-M44

EMA

MISC

DPSC

/MMC

I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus

MISC Bus #0 MISC Bus #1

DSP

ISAGT

CPU

CPR #0

ISAGT2

DSP

CPU

CPR #1

ISAGT2

PCI MEMPCI MEM

ISAGT

5.0

PCI bus ISA bus

PZ-PW92

DC-40V -58.6

SW ON

OFF

ALM

PALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

125V

AC/DC

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PZ-ME44

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 158

Revision 1.0

PZ-ME44

PCI Memory

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of connectors and lamps is shown in Figure 2-82.

Figure 2-82 Face Layout of PZ-ME44 (PCI MEM) Card

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

6. External Interface

See the NEAX2400 IPX-UMG Installation Manual.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

COPY Green Copy mode

OFF Self mode

SOFT Green Normally operating in copy mode (Valid when “copy” lamp lights)

OFF Remains OFF during ACT → STBY memory copy

WE Green Lights when Memory writing

CONN

COPY

SOFT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 159

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

1. General Function

The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral Component

Interconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/or

Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI).

Figure 2-83 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI)

To another Fusion Node

FCCHDTIDTIFCCH

HUB

LANI

LANI CPUISAGT

ISAGT

LANI

DSPDSP

CPR #1CPR #0

NIC

MAT

PCI

10-BASE-T

CPU

IMX

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 160

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-84.

Figure 2-84 External Interface for PZ-PC19

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-85.

Figure 2-85 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 Card

Mounting Module LPM

PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT)

CPU BOARD

PZ-DK224 (DSP)

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92 (PWR)

PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD)

10 BASE-T

EST3

EST2

EST1

EST0

PCI BUS INTERFACE

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 161

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

EST0 Green Layer 1 link has established.

EST1 Green Data packet sending/receiving.

EST2 Red Layer 1 link failure.

EST3 Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 162

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC19

Local Area Network Interface

6. External Interface

Figure 2-86 Cable Connections for PZ-PC19

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

24DTR

CN2

FCH

PZ-PC19(LANI)

HUB

10 BASE-T straight Cable10 BASE-T straight Cable

TO IMX MAT

10 BASE-T straight Cable

HUB

10AL (10)FLT CA

DTI

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 163

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22

Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC22

Local Area Network Interface

1. General Function

The PZ-PC22 (LANI) circuit card is a single port Ether card that builds up Fusion link or Ether LAN

corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component

Interconnect (PCI) bus slot in the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus.

This card is mounted on the CPR of CMP/LP in the IPX-UMG system.

Figure 2-87 Location of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card in the System

LAN CPU

LP#0

LAN CPU

CMP#0

LAN

CPU

SP#0

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

HUB

FCCH DTI

LANCPU

LP#1

LANCPU

CMP#1

LAN

CPU

SP#1

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

HUB

FCCHDTI

To other Fusion Node

NIC

MAT

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 164

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22

Local Area Network Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-PC22 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown in Figure 2-88.

Figure 2-88 Location of PZ-PC22

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-89.

Figure 2-89 Face Layout of PZ-PC22 (LANI) Card

5.0

CMP-CPR/LP-CPR

PCI bus ISA bus

PZ-PW92

DC-40V -58.6

SW ON

OFF

ALM

PALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

125V

AC/DC

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PZ-PC22

100M

TXRX

LINK

COL

LAN

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 165

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22

Local Area Network Interface

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

100M Green 100MHz mode

TXRX Green Data packet sending/receiving

LINK Green Link has been established.

COL Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 166

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC22

Local Area Network Interface

6. External Interface

Figure 2-90 External Interface for PZ-PC22 (LANI)

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

PZ-PC22 (LANI)

HUB

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 167

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23

Local Area Network Interface

PZ-PC23

Local Area Network Interface

1. General Function

The PZ-PC23 (LANI) circuit card is a multiple ports Ether card that builds up Fusion link or external Ether

LAN corresponding to 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX. In the IPX-UMG system, one connector is used for

Ethernet, and the other for Fusion link. The card is mounted on the Peripheral Component Interconnect

(PCI) bus slot within the CPR, and provides the interface to the Processor bus or Fusion link.

This card is mounted on the CPR of SP in the IPX-UMG system.

Figure 2-91 Location of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card in the System

LAN CPU

LP#0

LAN CPU

CMP#0

LAN

CPU

SP#0

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

HUB

FCCH DTI

LANCPU

LP#1

LANCPU

CMP#1

LAN

CPU

SP#1

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

HUB

FCCHDTI

To other Fusion Node

NIC

MAT

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 168

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23

Local Area Network Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PZ-PC23 (LANI) card is accommodated on the PCI bus Slot No.0 and No.3 in the CPR of SP as shown

in Figure 2-92.

Figure 2-92 Location for PZ-PC23

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-93.

Figure 2-93 Face Layout of PZ-PC23 (LANI) Card

5.0

PCI bus ISA bus

PZ-PW92

DC-40V -58.6

SW ON

OFF

ALM

PALM

OUTPWR

INPWR

125V

AC/DC

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PZ-PC23

SP-CPR

100M0

TXRX0

LINK0

COL0

LAN0

Note

100M1

TXRX1

LINK1

COL1

LAN1

Note: Connect the Ether cable to “LAN0” connector for Processor bus within the IPX-UMG system. When

Fusion network is used, connect the Ether cable to “LAN1” connector to establish Fusion link.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 2

Page 169

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23

Local Area Network Interface

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

100M0/1 Green 100MHz mode

LINK0/1 Green Link has been established.

TXRX0/1 Green Data packet sending/receiving

COL0/1 Yellow Data packet collision has occurred.

CHAPTER 2 NDA-24296

Page 170

Revision 1.0

PZ-PC23

Local Area Network Interface

6. External Interface

Figure 2-94 External Interface for PZ-PC23 (LANI)

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

24DTR

CN2

FCH

PZ-PC23(LANI)

PZ-PC19(LANI)

HUB

Connected to

the MAT

10 BASE-T Straight Cable

HUB

10AL (10)FLT CA

DTI

HUB(PH-CM103)

10 BASE-T Straight Cable 10 BASE-T Straight Cable

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

NDA-24296 Chapter 3

Page 171

Revision 1.0

CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE

1. GENERAL

This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards.

•General Function

Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card.

•Mounting Location/Condition

Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If there

are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained.

•Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face

layout.

•Lamp Indications

Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed.

•Switch Settings

Each circuit card’s switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard

setting, etc.

• External Interface

If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting

slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are

provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector

lead locations and the connecting routes are shown.

In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 172

Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up of

a maximum of eight parties.

A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive an

answer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of a

C.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signal

and/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time.

The card adopts “N-1 addition” method for establishing a conference.

Note: This circuit card is used for following features:

•Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [S-56])

•Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-2])

•Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual [A-121])

•Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual)

Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System

NETWORK

Answer/Release Signal →

Conferee

Conference

Originator

CPU

Local I/O Bus

INT SW INT PA-CFTB

PCM INT

VPROC

PCM INT: PCM Interface

VPROC: Voice Processor Block

TLT

This diagram shows an example of a “Preset” conference involving Tie Line connections.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 173

Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 174

Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP

NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL0

BL7

Red BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy.

OPE

N-OPE

SW2

SW1

SW0

BL7

BL0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 175

Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW0

1ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

2ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

3ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

4ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

5ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

6ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

7ON

OFF ×Fixed in the system

8ON

OFF ×Fixed in the system

123456 78

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 176

Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

SW1

1ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

2ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

3ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

4ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

5ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

6ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

7ON ×Fixed in the system

OFF

8ON

OFF ×Fixed in the system

SW2

1ON ×µ-law PCM encoder

OFF A-law PCM encoder

2ON Conference connection is set up by PB tel.

OFF Conference connection is not set up by PB tel.

ON When port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388, SP-

457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114.

OFF When Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519, SP-

1141.

4OFF×Not used

5OFF×Not used

6OFF×Not used

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

12345678

1234 56 78

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 177

Revision 1.0

PA-CFTB

8-party Conference Trunk

6. Switch Setting Sheet

SW2

ON CFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting

OFF

MODULE SLOT

NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW0

SW1

SW2

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW2-7 SW2-8 PAD [dB]

OFF OFF 0

OFF ON 3

ON OFF 6

ON ON 9

123456 7 8

12345678

123456 7 8

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 178

Revision 1.0

PA-CK14

Oscillator

PA-CK14

Oscillator

1. General Function

The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the source

clock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is

a clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (±5 ppm

deviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clock-

source-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (±0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card is

mounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO.

Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System

SEL

TDSW

MUX0

PLO

SEL

TDSW

MUX0

PLO

BWBBWB

BWB BWB

OSCOSC

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE

DSC 0 DSC 1

FRONT CABLES FRONT CABLES

MUX1 MUX2 MUX3 MUX1 MUX2 MUX3

LC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRKLC/TRK

DSC1

DSC0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 179

Revision 1.0

PA-CK14

Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in Port Interface Module number zero (PIM 0). The card mounted in slot

number 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for the secondary OSC.

Note: This card occupies two slots.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-4.

Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module PIM

OSC#0

OSC#1

PIM0

CLKOUT 0

CLKOUT 1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 180

Revision 1.0

PA-CK14

Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

6. External Interface

Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of

PIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

CLKOUT0 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0.

CLKOUT1 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB ON Make-busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 181

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization

with the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital

network. As seen in Figure 3-5, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network

selection.

Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System

TDSW00 TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03

SEL

PLL PLL

PLO #0 PLO #1

OSC OSC

TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13

SEL

34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A

MDF

BWB BWB

BWBBWB

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE

DCS 0

DCS 1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 182

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface

clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source

automatically in the order of:

1. DCS

2. DIU0

3. DIU1

4. DIU2

5. DIU3

6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 183

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit

card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for

the external hold tone source.

Figure 3-6 Music Source

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW00

PLO#0

TONE ROM

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW1

PLO#1

TONE ROM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 184

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO)

Mounting Module TSWM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO 0

PLO 1

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW8F

SWAC

SWAB

ACT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNC

ICK

PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 185

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure

•8 KHz output FH failure

•5 msec × “n” output FH failure

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock

source office

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC

Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

OFF

Remains off when either of the following has occurred:

•DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•Drifting failure

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

PALM Red Remains lit when power is abnormal.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 186

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON ×Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF When clock source failure has not occurred in all supply routes,

the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

6ON This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and

5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

8OFF ×Not used.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 187

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

SW02

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3

SWAC 1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

2OFF ×Not used.

SW8F

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW8F-1 SW8F-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW8F-3 SW8F-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 188

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWAB

Note: Don’t care.

4ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

5MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this

circuit card.

8ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Note OFF ON Buzzer

Note ON OFF Chime

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 189

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1

connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

PLO #1

PLO #0

26 1

FM 1

27 2

FM 0

28 3

SYN 1B

29 4

SYN 0B

30 5

DIU 3B

SYN 1A

31 6

DIU 2B

SYN 0A

32 7

DIU 1B

DIU 3A

33 8

DIU 0B

DIU 2A

34 9

DCS B

DIU 1A

35 10 DIU 0A

36 11 DCS A

37 12

38 13

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

TSWM

REAR VIEW

34PH EXCLK

CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

Installation Cable

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Mounting Module TSWM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 190

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram

DCSB1

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DCSA1

DCSB0

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DCSA0

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

PLO #0

PLO #1

DCS

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),

DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

MDFPBX

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 191

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16

Phase Lock Oscillator

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

SW02

SW03

SWAC

SW8F

SWAB

1234 ON

56 7 8

1234ON

5678

1 2 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

1234 ON

56 7 8

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 192

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card, used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization. With this

circuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-10, the

PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in 4-IMG System

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #0

TSW 00

BWB BWB

DTI0 DCS0

(MDF)

DCS1123

PLO #1

SEL

PLL

Drv

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

34PH EXCLK CA-A

TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 193

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-11 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

LN0/LMG0

(IMG2/IMG3) LN3/LMG3

(IMG2/IMG3)

/(IMG14/IMG15)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

HSW00

ISWM

HSW01

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0

(IMG0/IMG1)

from

LN/LMG DTI from

LN/LMG DTI

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN3/LMG3

(IMG0/IMG1)

/(IMG12/IMG13) 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

TSW00 TSW03

HSW10

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

PLO 0

DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1123

PLO 1

SEL

PLL

Drv

HSW11

TSW10 TSW13

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 194

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM(IMG1)

Mounting Module

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

ISWM

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 195

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-12.

Figure 3-12 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO)

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW11

SW10

SW12

OPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNC

ICK

CKPKG

ALM0

ALM1

PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

1234567812345678

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 196

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Note: This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card

is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (±5

ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

CKPKG

Note Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.

ALM0

Note Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.

ALM1

Note Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.

PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1”.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 197

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

The key setting of “SW01” differs depending on the mounting location.

[Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]

Note: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source

(DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON ×

Note 1 Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF ×

Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF ×

Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF ×

Note 1 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF ×

Note 1 When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on

outputting the current phase clock.

ON This circuit card is used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and 5m

Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF ×

Note 1 This circuit card is not used with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

8OFF ×Fixed to “OFF” (Not used).

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 198

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON ×Clock subordinate office. (Fixed)

OFF Clock source office.

ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF ×8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF ×When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on

outputting the current phase clock.

6ON ×This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card and

5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

(Fixed to “ON”)

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

8OFF ×Fixed OFF (Not used).

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 199

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Note 2: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISWM is used. The DTI

clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.

Note 3: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to “ON (=CLK card is not used).”

If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG,

•set to “OFF” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used.

•set to “ON” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.

SW02

Note 2

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0.

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1.

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2.

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3.

SW10

1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

Note 3

ON CLK card is not used.

OFF CLK card is used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 200

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

SW12

4ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

5MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit

card.

8ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

SW11-1 SW11-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW11-3 SW11-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Don’t Care ON OFF Buzzer

Don’t Care OFF ON Chime

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 201

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.

•LT cable connectors

Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

TSW

Front View

TSWM

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Backplane

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 202

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)

DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) → DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

REAR VIEW

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

MDF

Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

Front View

ISWM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 203

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•LT cable connectors

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.) DIU

leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) → DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-14 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)

EXCLK1 EXCLK0

Backplane

ISWM

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Installation Cable

ISWM

EXCLK0

(Slot No.09)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.13)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Rear View 26

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 204

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-15 shows an example of a

system with the PLO cards in dual configuration.

Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External

High-Stability Oscillator

MDF

ISW/CMG

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #1

CLK

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #0

CLK

PCM Cable(IP)

DCSA

DCSB

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK1 DCSB

DCSA

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

BASEU

ISWM

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 205

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-16 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes

that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

Figure 3-16 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

MDF

ISW/CMG

LN/LMG

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

Installation Cable

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable RA

POUTA

POUTB

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

LT Connector

Digital

Interface

EXCLK1

PLO#1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

Note 1:

Note 1

Note 2

PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx

leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 206

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-17 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

26 1

LEAD

NAME LEAD

NAME

27 2

28 3

No.

29 4

30 5

FM1

FM0

31 6

32 7

33 8

34 9

36 10

DIU 3B

DIU 2B DIU 3A

DIU 2A

DIU 1B DIU 1A

DIU 0B DIU 0A

CLK00

(Slot No.08)

CLK10

(Slot No.12)

TSWM1

TSWM0

ISWM

Installation Cable

DIU Connection Note MDF

To Digital Interface

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

PLO-CLK CA-A

DCS Connection

Note: For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-18.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 207

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-18 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital

Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG

system.)

Figure 3-18 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

POUT A

POUT B

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

Note 1:

Note 2

Note 1

PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.

DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

MDF

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Installation Cable

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

Digital

Interface

IMG

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 208

Revision 1.0

PH-CK16-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-19 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW10

SW11

SW12

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Pin Assignment

No.

LEAD

NAME

FM1

FM0

LEAD

NAME

No.

MUSIC

SOURCE

MDF

ISW-LN PLO CA-A/

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and

Installation Cable(25 P)

Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1

are required on the MDF.

Note

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.

1234 ON

56 7 8

1234 ON

56 7 8

1 2 ON

1ON

234

1234 ON

56 7 8

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 209

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization

with the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG system

can be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-20, the PLO can be redundant

regardless of the system switching network selection.

Figure 3-20 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System

TDSW00 TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03

SEL

PLL PLL

PLO #0 PLO #1

OSC OSC

TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13

SEL

34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A

MDF

BWB BWB

BWBBWB

DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE

DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE

DCS 0

DCS 1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 210

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface

clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source

automatically in the order of:

1. DCS

2. DIU0

3. DIU1

4. DIU2

5. DIU3

6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting

The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows:

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 211

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit

card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for

the external hold tone source.

Figure 3-21 Music Source

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW00

PLO#0

TONE ROM

SEL

Speech Path Memory

for Music/Tone

Music/Tone

MUSIC ROM

TDSW1

PLO#1

TONE ROM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 212

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO)

TSWM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM

PLO 0

PLO 1

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW06

SW05

SW04

ACT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYNC

ICK

PALM

SW01

SW02

SW03

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 213

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office.

•32.768 MHz output clock failure.

•8 KHz output FH failure.

•5 msec × “n” output FH failure.

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card).

•Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock

source office.

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed.

•Drifting failure.

•Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) failure.

SYNC

Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

OFF

Remains off when either of the following has occurred.

•DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS.

•DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI.

•Drifting failure.

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

PALM Red Remains lit when power is abnormal.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 214

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

2ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

3ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals

(which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card

and 5m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS)

card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music.

8 OFF ×Not used.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 215

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

SW02

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3

SW05 1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

2OFF Not used.

SW06

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW8F-1 SW8F-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW8F-3 SW8F-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 216

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

SW04

Note: Don’t care.

4ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

5MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this

circuit card.

8ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Note OFF ON Buzzer

Note ON OFF Chime

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 217

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

5. External Interface

When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1

connectors on the backplane of the TSWM.

Figure 3-23 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Slot No.

TSWM

FRONT VIEW

PLO #1

PLO #0

26 1

FM 1

27 2

FM 0

28 3

SYN 1B

29 4

SYN 0B

30 5

DIU 3B

SYN 1A

31 6

DIU 2B

SYN 0A

32 7

DIU 1B

DIU 3A

33 8

DIU 0B

DIU 2A

34 9

DCS B

DIU 1A

35 10 DIU 0A

36 11 DCS A

37 12

38 13

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

TSWM

REAR VIEW

34PH EXCLK

CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A

34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION

Installation Cable

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Mounting Module TSWM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 218

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-24 Connecting Route Diagram

DCSB1

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DCSA1

DCSB0

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DCSA0

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

POUT B

POUT A

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

CCT /DTI

/PRT

PLO #0

PLO #1

DCS

Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB),

DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC).

MDFPBX

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 219

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW05

SW06

SW04

1234ON

5678

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

1 2 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 220

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

1. General Function

This circuit card used with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization between

networks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system containing this

circuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-25, the PLO can be

redundant regardless of the system switching network selection.

Figure 3-25 Location of PH-CK17-A in 4-IMG System

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

34PH EXCLK CA-A

PLO #0

TSW 00

BWB BWB

DTI0 DCS0

(MDF)

DCS1123

PLO #1

SEL

PLL

Drv

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

34PH EXCLK CA-A

TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03 TSW 00 TSW 01 TSW 02 TSW 03

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 221

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-26 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) in IPX-U/IPX-UMG System

LN0/LMG0

(IMG2/IMG3) LN3/LMG3

(IMG2/IMG3)

/(IMG14/IMG15)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

HSW00

ISWM

HSW01

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0

(IMG0/IMG1)

from

LN/LMG DTI from

LN/LMG DTI

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

LN3/LMG3

(IMG0/IMG1)

/(IMG12/IMG13) 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(

System1

)

MUX

(

System0

)

LC/TRK

TSW00 TSW03

HSW10

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

PLO 0

DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1123

PLO 1

SEL

PLL

Drv

HSW11

TSW10 TSW13

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 222

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below.

TSWM0(IMG1)

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

TSWM(IMG1)

Mounting Module

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

ISWM

Mounting Module

TSWM0(IMG1/5/9/13)

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

PLO (#0)

PLO (#1)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 223

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-27:

Figure 3-27 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO)

1 2 3 4

1 2

SW11

SW10

SW12

OPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW01

SW02

SW03

1234567812345678

SYNC

ICK

CKPKG

ALM0

ALM1

PALM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 224

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Note: This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system. When this card

is mounted in ISWM, this lamp is not used.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

MJ Red

Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred:

•All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock

subordinate office

•32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card)

•Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card)

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock

source office

MN Red

Lights when the following MN fault has occurred:

•One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed

•Drifting failure

•Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure

SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network.

ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally.

CKPKG

Note Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation.

ALM0

Note Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card.

ALM1

Note Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card.

PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 225

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW03 1 - F 1 Fixed to “1.”

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 226

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

The key setting of “SW01” differs depending on the mounting location.

[Mounted in ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System or TSWM of 4-IMG System]

Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, specify the clock source (DCS

or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office.

Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in ISWM of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON ×

Note 2 Clock subordinate office.

OFF Clock source office.

ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

OFF ×

Note 2 Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

OFF ×

Note 2 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF ×

Note 2 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF ×

Note 2 When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO keeps on

outputting the current phase clock.

This circuit card is used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16

WCS) card and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC

card.

OFF ×

Note 2 This circuit card is not used associated with SYNC (PA-CK16

WCS) card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold.

8OFF ×Fixed to “OFF” (Not used).

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 227

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

[Mounted in TSWM0 of IPX-U/IPX-UMG System]

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

1ON ×Clock subordinate office. (Fixed)

OFF Clock source office.

ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #1 system.)

OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used.

(In case this circuit card is accommodated as #0 system.)

ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

OFF ×8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS

signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz).

ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator.

OFF × When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the

PLO continues outputting the current phase clock.

ON ×This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card

and 5 m Frame Pulse (FP) is supplied by the SYNC card.

(Fixed to “ON” )

OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS)

card.

7ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

OFF ×µ-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold.

8OFF ×Fixed OFF (Not used).

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 228

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Note 1: When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IPX-U/IPX-UMG system, DCS clock from the ISWM is used.

The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure.

Note 2: When this card is mounted in ISWM, set to “ON (=CLK card is not used).”

If mounted in TSWM0 on LN/LMG,

•set to “OFF” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is used.

•set to “ON” if TSWM1 (CLK card, PH-CK18) on the same LN/LMG is not used.

SW02

Note 1

1ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero.

OFF DIU 0 is not used.

2ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one.

OFF DIU 1 is not used.

3ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two.

OFF DIU 2 is not used.

4ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three.

OFF DIU 3 is not used.

5ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 0.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0.

6ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 1.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1.

7ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 2.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2.

8ON ×1.5 M clock for DIU 3.

OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3.

SW10

1ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead.

OFF ×MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone.

Note 2

ON CLK card is not used.

OFF ×CLK card is used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 229

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

SW12

4ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

5MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit

card.

8ON Not used.

OFF ×Not used.

SW11-1 SW11-2 Impedance of the External

Music Source 0 (FM 0)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW11-3 SW11-4 Impedance of the External

Music Source 1 (FM 1)

OFF OFF 600 Ω

ON OFF 8.2 Ω

OFF ON 47K Ω

SW12-1 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC

OFF OFF OFF Für Elise

ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer

Don’t Care ON OFF Buzzer

Don’t Care OFF ON Chime

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 230

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

6. External Interface

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM.

•LT cable connectors

Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane.

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

TSW

Front View

TSWM

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

Backplane

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 231

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)

DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-28 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2)

PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1.

•PLO mounting slots

The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM.

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

REAR VIEW

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

TSWM

MDF

Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

EXCLK0

EXCLK1 PLO

PLO

Front View

ISWM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 232

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•LT cable connectors

Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the ISWM backplane.

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (1/2)

•EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment

Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a

digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the four inputs. (There are a maximum of four inputs.)

DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low).

Figure 3-29 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISWM) (2/2)

EXCLK1 EXCLK0

Backplane

ISWM

MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

Installation Cable

ISWM

EXCLK0

(Slot No.09)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.13)

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Rear View 26

FM1

FM0

DIU3B

DIU2B

DIU1B

DIU0B

DCSB

SYN1B

SYN0B

DIU3A

DIU2A

DIU1A

DIU0A

DCSA

SYN1A

SYN0A

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 233

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

•Cable Connection Diagram

Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The connection diagram in Figure 3-30 shows an example of a

system that has the PLO cards in dual configuration.

Figure 3-30 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External

High-Stability Oscillator

MDF

ISW/CMG

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #1

CLK

External

High-Stability

Oscillator #0

CLK

PCM Cable(IP)

DCSA

DCSB

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK1 DCSB

DCSA

LT Connector Cable

EXCLK0

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

BASEU

ISWM

maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 234

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN/LMG. This example assumes

that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route.

Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (ISWM) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

MDF

ISW/CMG

LN/LMG

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

Installation Cable

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable RA

POUTA

POUTB

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

LT Connector

Digital

Interface

EXCLK1

PLO#1

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG)

Note 1:

Note 1

Note 2

PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx

leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 235

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-32 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

CLK00

(Slot No.08)

CLK10

(Slot No.12)

TSWM1

TSWM0

ISWM

Installation Cable

DIU Connection Note MDF

To Digital Interface

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

PLO-CLK CA-A

DCS Connection

Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page.

26 1

LEAD

NAME LEAD

NAME

27 2

28 3

No.

29 4

30 5

FM1

FM0

31 6

32 7

33 8

34 9

35 10

DIU 3B

DIU 2B DIU 3A

DIU 2A

DIU 1B DIU 1A

DIU 0B DIU 0A

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 236

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-33 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital

Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. (This connection is not required for IPX-UMG

system.)

Figure 3-33 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface

DIU0A1

DIU0B1

DIU1A1

DIU1B1

DIU2A1

DIU2B1

DIU3A1

DIU3B1

DIU0A0

DIU0B0

DIU1A0

DIU1B0

DIU2A0

DIU2B0

DIU3A0

DIU3B0

POUT A

POUT B

PCM Cable (2P) to other node

PCM

Carrier

Equipment

DSU

CLK

Note 1:

Note 2

Note 1

PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes.

DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority.

Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system.

MDF

maximum 100

meters (330 feet)

(24AWG)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Installation Cable

EXCLK1

PLO#1

EXCLK0

PLO#0

Digital

Interface

IMG

maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 237

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

Figure 3-34 Connection of External Music-On-Hold

ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A

Pin Assignment

No.

LEAD

NAME

FM1

FM0

LEAD

NAME

No.

MUSIC

SOURCE

MDF

ISW-LN PLO CA-A /

34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and

Installation Cable(25P)

Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1

are required on the MDF.

Note

Note: FM1 is not used at this time.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 238

Revision 1.0

PH-CK17-A

Phase Lock Oscillator

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW10

SW11

SW12

1 2 3 4 ON

5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4 ON

5 6 7 8

12ON

1ON

2 3 4

1234ON

5678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 239

Revision 1.0

PH-CK18

Clock

PH-CK18

Clock

1. General Function

This circuit card is used for the Local Node (LN) of the IPX-U system or used for the Local Module Group

(LMG) of the IPX-UMG system. The main function of this circuit card is to supply basic clock signals to

the system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) located in TSWM0 of

IMG1/5/9/13, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW) located in TSWM1 of

IMG2/6/10/14.

•32.768 MHz CLK

•8 KHz FH

•5 msec × “n” FH (for Wireless System)

Figure 3-35 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK)

LN0/LMG0

(IMG2/IMG3) LN3/LMG3

(IMG2/IMG3)

/(IMG14/IMG15)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(System1)

MUX

(System0)

LC/TRK

HSW00

ISW

HSW01

CLK1

(TSWM1)

TSW

10~13

CLK0

(TSWM1)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(System1)

MUX

(System0)

LC/TRK

LN0/LMG0

(IMG0/IMG1)

from

LN/LMG DTI from

LN/LMG DTI

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

(BWB)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

64K+FH, WFH

TSW ACT

(Cable)

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(System1)

MUX

(System0)

LC/TRK

LN3/LMG3

(IMG0/IMG1)

/(IMG12/IMG13) 32M, FH+WFH

PLO ACT

PLO 1

(TSWM0)

TSW

10~13

PLO 0

(TSWM0)

TSW

00~03

MUX

(System1)

MUX

(System0)

LC/TRK

TSW00 TSW03

HSW10

OSC 64K+8K

(BWB)

CLK, FH, WFH

ACT, ALM

PLO 0

DTI0 DCS0 (MDF) DCS1123

PLO 1

SEL

PLL

Drv

HSW11

TSW10 TSW13

SEL

PLL

Drv

OSC

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 240

Revision 1.0

PH-CK18

Clock

2. Mounting Location/Condition

Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in the figure below:

Figure 3-36 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CLK (#0)

TSWM1(IMG2/6/10/14)

Mounting Module

CLK (#1)

OPE

ALM0

ALM1

PALM

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 241

Revision 1.0

PH-CK18

Clock

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below:

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below.

LAMP COLOR MEANING

OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state.

ALM 0 Red Lights when clock signal failure has occurred.

ALM 1 Red Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred.

PALM Red Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB ON Circuit card Make-busy.

OFF ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 242

Revision 1.0

PH-CK18

Clock

6. External Interface

Figure 3-37 LT Connector Lead Location (ISWM-TSWM0/1)

CLK00

(Slot No.08)

CLK10

(Slot No.12)

TSWM1

TSWM0

ISWM

Installation Cable

DIU Connection Note MDF

To Digital Interface and/or DCS

EXCLK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

EXCLK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

PLO CLOCK0

(Slot No.21)

PLO CLOCK1

(Slot No.23)

ISW-LN PLO CA-A

PLO-CLK CA-A

DCS Connection

26 1

LEAD

NAME LEAD

NAME

27 2

28 3

No.

29 4

30 5

31 6

32 7

33 8

34 9

35 10

DIU 3B

DIU 2B

DIU 3A

DIU 2A

DIU 1B

DIU 1A

DIU 0B DIU 0A

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 243

Revision 1.0

PH-CK18

Clock

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 244

Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 8C.O. lines and the

system. And this card also provides the caller ID service. Depending upon keys setting of this card, the first

circuit on this card can be used as an interface for Paging Equipment. In this instance, the second circuit is

also used for the purpose of activating the Paging Equipment. Example of the Paging Equipment and Caller

ID service are illustrated below. In addition, the appropriate value of Terminal Impedance and Balancing

Network (BNW) can be selected by key setting.

Figure 3-38 Location of PA-8COTBJ (8COT) Card within the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-8COTBJ (8COT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

This diagram shows an example where this card is used as both a PGT and COTs.

Terminal

INT

"555-1234"

Attendant

Console

ATI

SW INT

COT

circuit 1

circuit 2

circuit 7

circuit 8

PA-8COTBJ MDF

Speech Line

Control Line

"555-1234"

PAGING

EQUIPMENT

To Battery

PUBLIC

NETWORK

"555-1234"

Terminal

Local I/O Bus

MODEM

CPU

MODEM

COT

PGT

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 245

Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-39.

Figure 3-39 Face Layout of PA-8COTBJ (8COT)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

8COT Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BL0

BL7

Green

Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding

circuit is in make busy state.

OFF BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

OPE

BL4~7

BL0~3

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW05

SW00

(MB)

SW01

(MB0-7)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 246

Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01

(MB0-7)

ON Request for make-busy of the trunk circuit corre-

sponding to MB switch.

OFF ×Request for cancelling the make-busy of the trunk cir-

cuit corresponding to MB switch.

SW02 1-4

Terminal Impedance and B.N.W.setting

SW03

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF (Not Used)

SW04

1ON ×Fixed to ON

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4ON Paging Trunk is available (When this switch is set to

ON, CH0 and CH1 cannot be used as CO trunks.)

OFF Paging Trunk is not available.

SW05

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2ON ×Fixed to ON

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW0 (SW10) MEANINGS

1234 B.N.W. Terminal

Impedance

OFF OFF OFF OFF EIA/TIA 464-A 600 Ω+2.16 µ

OFF ON ON OFF CCITT Q.517 900 Ω+2.16 µ

ON ON ON OFF 900 Ω

Other Combinations Inhibited

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 247

Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

6. External Interface

Figure 3-40 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 248

Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

Figure 3-41 Connecting Route Diagram

Table 3-1 Balancing Network and Terminal Impedance

Balancing Network Terminal Impedance

EIA/TIA 464-A

900Ω

CCITT Q. 517

AT&T Echo Test

Network

Note: As illustrated above, two circuits (#0, #1) are required for connecting paging equipment.

•Cable Connections for Paging Equipment

PBX Installation Cable MDF

LT Connector

COT PUBLIC

NETWORK

PBX

COT

-48V

FUSE -48V

Installation Cable MDF

LT Connector

GControl Line

Speech Path

PAGING EQUIPMENT

•Cable Connections for a C.O. Line

0.21µF

1 k Ω

350 Ω

2.16µF

600 Ω

600+2.16µ

900 Ω

2.16µF

900 Ω

0.05µF

100 Ω

800 Ω

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 249

Revision 1.0

PA-8COTBJ

Central Office Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

UP: Circuit card make busy.

DOWN: Circuit card make busy

cancel.

SW01

(MB0-7)

Make Busy switches associated

with No. 0 through No. 7

Circuits.

ON: Make busy on each

circuit basis.

OFF: Make busy cancel on

each circuit basis.

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW05

OFF

No.8

No.7

No.6

No.5

No.4

No.3

No.2

No.1

1234 ON

1234ON

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 250

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

1. General Function

This circuit card is accommodated in the PIM and supports the following interface.

(a) Interface with 16 C.O. lines

(b) Interface with 14 C.O. lines and 1 Paging Equipment line.

Figure 3-42 Location of PA-16COTBE (16COT) Card within the System

TSW

Paging Equipment

C.O. Line

COT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 251

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 252

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-43.

Figure 3-43 Face Layout of PA-16 COTBE (16COT)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BL0

BL15

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes to the dial pulses being sent out for an outgoing call, or the corresponding circuit

is in make busy state.

OFF BL- lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

OPE

SW00(MB)

BL15

BL0

SW02(MB8-15)

SW01(MB0-7)

SW0 SW1

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 253

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01

(MB0 ~ 7)

0ON No. 0 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 0 Circuit make busy cancel

1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 1 Circuit make busy cancel

2ON No. 2 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 2 Circuit make busy cancel

3ON No. 3 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 3 Circuit make busy cancel

4ON No. 4 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 4 Circuit make busy cancel

5ON No. 5 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 5 Circuit make busy cancel

6ON No. 6 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 6 Circuit make busy cancel

7ON No. 7 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 7 Circuit make busy cancel

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 254

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW02

(MB8 ~ 15)

0ON No. 8 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 8 Circuit make busy cancel

1ON No. 9 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 9 Circuit make busy cancel

2ON No. 10 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 10 Circuit make busy cancel

3ON No. 11 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 11 Circuit make busy cancel

4ON No. 12 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 12 Circuit make busy cancel

5ON No. 13 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 13 Circuit make busy cancel

6ON No. 14 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 14 Circuit make busy cancel

7ON No. 15 Circuit make busy

OFF ×No. 15 Circuit make busy cancel

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 255

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

Note: Switch No.5-8 is only available when SP-3331 is used for E911 service. If SP-3003 is used, these switches

are fixed to off.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW0

(SW10)

1 - 4

Terminal Impedance

5, 6

Wink Signal Detection Time.

7, 8

Answer Signal Detection Time.

SW0 (SW10) MEANING

1 2 3 4 Terminal impedance

OFF OFF OFF OFF 600 Ω + 2.16 µF

OFF ON ON OFF 900 Ω + 2.16 µF

Other Combinations Not used

SW0 (SW10) Detection Time

OFF OFF 56 ms

ON OFF 96 ms

OFF ON 136 ms

ON ON 176 ms

SW0 (SW10) Detection Time

OFF OFF 56 ms

ON OFF 96 ms

OFF ON 136 ms

ON ON 176 ms

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 256

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW1

(SW11)

1ON ×Fixed

OFF

2ON

OFF ×Fixed

ON (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if ringing

signal does not arrive longer than three seconds.)

OFF ×Fixed (Call abandon detecting condition - Disconnection if

ringing signal does not arrive longer than six seconds.)

ON Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a

Paging trunk (No. 1 Circuit cannot be used as a C.O. trunk)

OFF Availability of Paging Function - No. 0 Circuit is used as a

C.O. trunk (No. 1 Circuit can be used as a C.O. trunk)

5ON

OFF ×Fixed

6ON ×Fixed

OFF

7ON

OFF ×Fixed

8ON

OFF ×Fixed

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 257

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

PAD Setting

ARTD APAD TRANSMIT

(D-A) PAD RECEIVE

(A-D) PAD REMARKS

7 15 0dB 0dB

2 2 3dB 3dB

3 3 6dB 6dB

4 4 0dB -5dB

(Gain)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 258

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in

Figure 3-44.

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

1212 12

12 1212

PWR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 259

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

Figure 3-44 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

PWR

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

3 3 3 3 3 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 260

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)

Figure 3-45 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

C.O. Line

COT

Connection with C.O. Line

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

COT

Connection with Paging Equipment

Paging Equipment

(MR)

B1 G

-48V

FUSE

Distibution Board

Speech Signal Leads

-48V

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 261

Revision 1.0

PA-16COTBE

Central Office Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00 (MB)

UP : Circuit card make busy

DOWN: Circuit card make busy

cancel

SW01

(MB0-7)

Make Busy Switches associated

with No. 0 through No. 7 Circuits.

ON : Make busy on each circuit

basis.

OFF: Make busy cancel on each

circuit basis.

SW02

(MB8-15)

Make Busy Switches associated

with No. 8 through No. 15 Circuits.

ON : Make busy on each circuit

basis.

OFF: Make busy cancel on each

circuit basis.

SW0

SW1

OFF

No.7

No.6

No.5

No.4

No.3

No.2

No.1

No.0

OFF

No.7

No.6

No.5

No.4

No.3

No.2

No.1

No.0

ON 123 45678

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 262

Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

1. General Function

This circuit card is an attendant console (ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface function

for accommodating ATTCON (maximum two sets of ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of AT-

TCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB sig-

nals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (ATTCON Call Termination Information) link

interface function, etc. The PA-CS02-C card is exclusively for a system which adopts “µ-law” as its encod-

ing law.

Figure 3-46 Location of PA-CS02-C (2ATI) Card within the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CS02-C (ATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

CPU GATE

INT

I/O Local Bus

12M PCM Highway

2M PCM Highway ×12

PM Bus ×2

ATTENDANT

CONSOLE (×2)

: Control Line

: Speech Path

IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus

PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus

ATI

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

ATI

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 263

Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-47.

Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-CS02-C (2ATI)

OPE

N-OPE

BLS1

BLS0

SW7

SW8

BLA1

BLA0

SW6

SW2

SW3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 264

Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Table 3-2 ATI Card Lamp Indication

LAMP COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BLS0

BLS1

Red Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in make-busy state or when select signals

are being transmitted.

BLA0

BLA1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB —UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW2 (TAS1)

SW3 (TAS0)

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE

SW2-1/

SW3-1 SW2-2/

SW3-2 SW2-3/

SW3-3 SW2-4/

SW3-4 RESISTANCE

OFF

0 Ω

200 Ω

390 Ω

590 Ω

820 Ω

1020 Ω

1210 Ω

1410 Ω

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 265

Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW6 (TAS1)

SW7 (TAS0)

SW8

0ON No. 0 circuit make-busy request

OFF ×Normal setting

1ON No. 1 circuit make-busy request

OFF ×Normal setting

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SW6-1/

SW7-1 SW6-2/

SW7-2 SW6-3/

SW7-3 SW6-4/

SW7-4 TAS

(A WIRE) TAS

(B WIRE)

ON ON ON ON -48V G

OFF ON OFF OFF CR G

OFF ON OFF ON G G

OFF OFF OFF ON LOOP LOOP

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 266

Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-48.

Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

PIM

Highway Block

ATI

SW1

ATT0

ATT1

RLT

[ATT TERM (PZ-M366)]

SW0

To LT5/LT11

50 24

< LT Connector on the ATT TERM>

TAS 0A

TAS 1A

TAS 0B

TAS 1B

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 267

Revision 1.0

PA-CS02-C

Attendant Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

12, 23

SW2

SW3

SW6

SW7

SW8

1234

1 2 3 4

12 3 4

OFF

No.3

No.2

No.1

No.0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 268

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

1. General Function

This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interface

function for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling

of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending

of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination

Information) link interface function, etc.

Figure 3-49 Location of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card in the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CS08 (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below.

CPU GT

TDSW

MUX

2M PCM Highway

PM Bus

ATTENDANT

CONSOLE (×2)

: Control Line

: Speech Path

I/O Local Bus: Input/Output Local Bus

PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus

HMATI

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

HMATI

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 269

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-50.

Figure 3-50 Face Layout of PA-CS08 (HMATI) Card

OPE

N-OPE

FU0 (Note )

SW11

BLS1

BLA1

BLA0

SW04

SW03

SW02

SW08

SW07

SW09

SW12

FU1 (Note )

BLS0

Note: When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.

<Extraction> MB key → ON Remove the FU0 and FU1. Extract this card.

<Insertion> Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. Plug in the FU0 and FU1.

MB key → OFF

1 2 3

1 2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 270

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

BLS0

BLS1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Blink

Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Note: The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.

BLA0

BLA1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 271

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW02 (TAS0)

SW03 (TAS1)

SW04

1ON ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3ON ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

SW07 (TAS0)

SW08 (TAS1)

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)

1-48VG

2CRG

3GG

4 LOOP LOOP

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE

SW7-1/

SW8-1 SW7-2/

SW8-2 SW7-3/

SW8-3 SW7-4/

SW8-4 RESISTANCE

OFF

0 Ω

200 Ω

390 Ω

590 Ω

820 Ω

1020 Ω

1210 Ω

1410 Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 272

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

Note: When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX

114, b7 = I.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

1ON

OFF ×Fixed

2ON

OFF ×Fixed

3ON

OFF ×Fixed

4ON

OFF ×Fixed

SW12

1ON ×

Fixed (all ON)

OFF

2ON ×

OFF

3ON ×

OFF

4ON ×

OFF

SW9

0ON No. 0 System is in Make-busy request.

OFF ×Normal setting

1ON No. 1 System is in Make-busy request.

OFF ×Normal setting

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 273

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

6. External Interface

The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-51.

Figure 3-51 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

PIM

Mounting Module

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4

LT5

1915

1814

1713

1612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HMATI

Group No.

Slot No.

PIM

50 24

LT5, 11 Connector

(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)

TAS 0A0

TAS 1A0

TAS 0B0

TAS 1B0

LT11

HMATI

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 274

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08

Hotel Attendant Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MB UP: Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW07

SW08

SW09 SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used

SW11

SW12

1234

1 2 3 4

No. 3

No. 2

No. 1

No. 0

OFF

(Piano Switch)

1234

1 2 3 4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 275

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

1. General Function

This circuit card is Hotel attendant console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card which supports the interface

function for accommodating Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM func-

tion (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending

function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON

Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc.

Figure 3-52 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card within the System

CPU GT

TSW

MUX

I/O Local Bus

2M PCM Highway

PM Bus

ATTENDANT

CONSOLE (×2)

: Control Line

: Speech Path

I/O Local Bus: Input/Output Local Bus

PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus

HMATI

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 276

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

HMATI

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 277

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown below.

Figure 3-53 Face Layout of PA-CS08-B (HMATI)

OPE

N-OPE

FU0 (Note)

SW11

BLS1

BLA1

BLA0

SW04

SW03

SW02

SW08

SW07

SW09

SW12

FU1 (Note)

BLS0

Note: When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.

<Extraction> MB key → ON Remove the FU0 and FU1. Extract this card.

<Insertion> Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. Plug in the FU0 and FU1.

MB key → OFF

1 2 3

1 2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 278

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state

BLS0

BLS1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy

Blink

Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy

Note: The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out.

BLA0

BLA1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy

Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 279

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW02 (TAS0)

SW03 (TAS1) 1

SW04 1ON ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3ON ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

SW07 (TAS0)

SW08 (TAS1) 1

SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM

SWITCH TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE)

1-48VG

2CRG

3GG

4 LOOP LOOP

SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE

SW7-1/

SW8-1 SW7-2/

SW8-2 SW7-3/

SW8-3 SW7-4/

SW8-4 RESISTANCE

OFF

0 Ω

200 Ω

390 Ω

590 Ω

820 Ω

1020 Ω

1210 Ω

1410 Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 280

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

Note: When PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~ 4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX

114, b7 = I.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11 1ON

OFF ×Fixed

2ON

OFF ×Fixed

3ON

OFF ×Fixed

4ON

OFF ×Fixed

SW12 1ON ×

Fixed (all ON)

OFF

2ON ×

OFF

3ON ×

OFF

4ON ×

OFF

SW9 0ON No. 0 System is in make-busy request.

OFF ×Normal setting

1ON No. 1 System is in make-busy request.

OFF ×Normal setting

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 281

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card is as shown in Figure 3-54.

Figure 3-54 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4

LT5

1915

1814

1713

1612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HMATI

Group No.

Slot No.

PIM

50 24

LT5, 11 Connector

(LT Connector on the ATT TERM)

TAS 0A0

TAS 1A0

TAS 0B0

TAS 1B0

LT11

HMATI

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 282

Revision 1.0

PA-CS08-B

Hotel Attendant Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MB UP: Circuit card make busy

DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW07

SW08

SW09 SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used

SW11

SW12

1234

1 2 3 4

No. 3

No. 2

No. 1

No. 0

OFF

(Piano Switch)

1 2 3 4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 283

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

1. General Function

This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating two

sets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function.

Figure 3-55 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System

MUX

TSW/INT/PLO

MUX

CPR

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

LC/TRK ATI

DESK

CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 284

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-56.

Figure 3-56 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI)

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

ATI

Universal Slots Universal Slots

SW00

OPE

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW17

SW16

SW11 SW14

SW10

SW12 SW15

SW13

PALM

BLA1

BLA0

SW01

BLS1

BLS0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 285

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Setting

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally.

OFF Off when circuit card is not operating.

PALM Red Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred.

OFF Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally.

BLA0

BLA1

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on

the Desk Console).

Flash

(60 IPM) Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns on PA lamp on the

Desk console).

BLS0

BLS1

Red Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use.

Flash

(60 IPM)

Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select sig-

nals are being transmitted.

OFF Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00 UP Circuit card is Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW01

0ON ×Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console.

OFF Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console.

1ON ×Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console.

OFF Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console.

2OFF ×Not used.

3OFF ×Not used.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 286

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

SW10

(TAS#0)

SW13

(TAS#1)

SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively.

4 This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/15.

SW11/

SW12

(TAS#0)

SW14/

SW15

(TAS#1)

SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4

(TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1).

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10-3/

SW13-3 SW10-2/

SW13-2 SW10-1/

SW13-1 STANDARD

SETTING RESISTANCE

ON ON ON 0 Ω

ON ON OFF 220 Ω

ON OFF ON 398 Ω

ON OFF OFF 618 Ω

OFF ON ON 800 Ω

OFF ON OFF 1020 Ω

OFF OFF ON 1198 Ω

OFF OFF OFF ×1418 Ω

SW12/

SW15 SW11/

SW14 SW10-4/

SW13-4 STANDARD

SETTING

SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED

TAS 0A/

TAS 1A TAS 0B/

TAS 1B

ON ON ON CR G

OFF ON ON -48V G

OFF OFF OFF ×LOOP LOOP

OFF OFF ON G G

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 287

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Note: DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit card

initialization, regardless of the mode before the initialization.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW16

For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel applica-

tion, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below.

2ON Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available.

OFF Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available.

3SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as shown below.

6ON A-law PCM coding.

OFF ×µ-law PCM coding.

7 Refer to SW16-1.

8OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF).

SW17

1ON Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals.

OFF ×PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission.

2ON ×Fixed to ON.

Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6.

5~7 OFF ×Fixed to OFF.

Note ON Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization.

OFF ×Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization.

Desk Console

Key pattern

to be used

SW16-1 SW16-7 SYS 1 INDEX 160

Bit 1 Bit 0

Hotel type ON ON 1 1

OFF 0 1

Business type OFF ON —1

OFF —0

SW16-5 SW16-4 SW16-3 COUNTRY

ON ON OFF NORTH AMERICA

ON OFF ON AUSTRALIA

Other combinations Not used

SW17-3 SW17-4 SYS 1 INDEX 6

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4

OFF OFF 0 0 0

ON OFF 0 0 1

OFF ON 0 1 0

ON ON 1 0 0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 288

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

6. External Interface

Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-57.

Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

BN4800 BN4801

BN4820 BN4821

BN4830 BN4831

BN4810 BN4811

LT5, 11 Connector

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23

14 18 22 14 18 22

00 02 04 06 08 10 13 17 21 00 02 04 06 08 10 13 17 21

12 16 20 12 16 20

LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

Slot No.

Group No.

ATI

PIM

LT11

LT 6 LT 7 LT 8 LT 9 LT 1 0

#0 ADD ON

MODULE

#1 ADD ON

MODULE

BN4800 - 48v

BN4801 - 48v

BN4810 - 48v

BN4811 - 48v

#0 DESK

CONSOLE

#1 DESK

CONSOLE

BN4820 - 48v

BN4821 - 48v

BN4830 - 48v

BN4831 - 48v

Note: The lead for each

DESK CONSOLE is

shown below.

Note: The lead for each ADD

ON CONSOLE is

shown below.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 289

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Figure 3-58 Connecting Route Diagram

Note: The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power is

supplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally.

ATI

BN4820

BN4821

BN4830

BN4831

BN4830

BN4831

GND

BN4820

BN4821

GND

PBX

Installation

Cable

MDF IDF 6-PIN MODULAR

ROSETTE

#0 DESK

CONSOLE

6-PIN MODULAR

CABLE

#1 DESK

CONSOLE

GND

(PZ-M377)

(-48V)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 290

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Figure 3-59 shows how to connect Desk Console.

Figure 3-59 Desk Console Connection

Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance between

the ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below.

Source 0.5 φ Cable 0.65 φ Cable

PBX 1,148 ft. (350 m) 1,640 ft. (500 m)

Local Power Supply 3,937 ft. (1,200 m) 4,921 ft. (1,500 m)

Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below.

Bottom View

DESK CONSOLE

PAG E

(8-core) LINE

(6-core)

REC

(8-core)

6-core Modular Cable 6-core Modular Block IDF/MDF

DESK CONSOLE

Transformer Surge

Protection

DC/DC

Convertor

GND

–48V/–24V

Desk Console

Modular Jack 6-core Modular Cable

No.

LEAD

NAME PIN

No.

LEAD

NAME

BN4800

BN4820

BN4810

BN4830

BN4801

BN4821

BN4811

BN4831

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment

B1 A1

GND

- 48 V

GND

- 48 V

B2 A0 Add-on for

Console 0

Console 1

Add-on for

Note: GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 291

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

If the distance exceeds the above, estimate it according to the calculation after Figure 3-60.

Figure 3-60 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console

BN4830

BN4831

GND

BN4830

BN4831

BN4820

BN4821

BN4820

BN4821

GND

ATI

PBX

GND

(PZ-M377)

Installation

Cable MDF IDF

(-48V)

6-pin Modular

rosette

6-pin Modular

Cable

#0 DESK

CONSOLE

#1 DESK

CONSOLE

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 292

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette

The distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power

supply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following

formula:

m = a + b + c 26Ω

m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette

a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of A

b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of B

c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C

Example of Calculation

a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae:

Note: You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae. You may use cable lengths in

feet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of

length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot.

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables

u (Ω/m) × x (m) u (Ω/m) × x (m)

a = +

No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables

v (Ω/m) × y (m) v (Ω/m) × y (m)

b = +

No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables

w (Ω/m) × z (m) w (Ω/m) × z (m)

c = +

No. of DC -48V cablesNo. of GND cables

u: DC resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m)

v: DC resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m)

w: DC resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m)

x: Cable length (m) in the range of A

y: Cable length (m) in the range of B

z: Cable length (m) in the range of C

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 293

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-61.

Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM)

PIM

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4

LT5

1915

1814

1713

1612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

ATI

Group No.

Slot No.

PIM

50 24

LT5, 11 Connector

TAS0A

TAS1ATAS1B

TAS0B

LT11

ATI

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 294

Revision 1.0

PA-CS33

Attendant Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW00

SW01

SW10 (TAS #0)

SW13 (TAS #1)

SW11 (TAS #0)

SW12 (TAS #0)

SW14 (TAS #1)

SW15 (TAS #1)

SW16

SW17

OFF

1234 ON

OFF

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 295

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-8LCBR circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of eight analog voice terminals and

the system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card can send “Stutter Dial

Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided for

each channel. This card can be used for Caller ID service.

Figure 3-62 Location of PA-8LCBR (8LC) Card in the System

PUBLIC C.O. Line

NETWORK

INT

COT

Local I/O Bus

CPU

max. 1200 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

•Loop Resistance : Max. 1200 [Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

•Reverse Function : x 8 circuits

•Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp

(selectable)

(PA-8LC BR)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 296

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 297

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-63.

Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-8LCBR (8LC)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATUS MEANING

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating nor-

mally.

BL0

BL7

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED

keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of

the ringing signal.

2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses

from a line are being received, Busy LED keeps

flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses

coming from the line.

3) Line is in make-busy state.

Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW01

SW10

OPE

SW00

(MB)

BL7

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 298

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on this circuit card have the following meanings.

Note 1: When Caller ID is in service, set SW16-1 to OFF (Separate mode).

Note 2: Valid when SW16-1 is set to ON (Common mode).

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW10

1ON×

Fixed

2OFF×

3OFF×

4OFF×

SW11 1OFF×Fixed

2OFF×

SW12 1OFF×Fixed

2OFF×

SW13 1OFF×Fixed

2OFF×

SW14

1ON Momentary Open

OFF Polarity Reverse

ON Message Waiting Lamp flashes

(1-sec. ON, 1-sec. OFF)

OFF Message Waiting Lamp lights or flashes

(Selected and Controlled by software)

SW15

1OFF×Fixed

2ON Stutter Dial Tone is available

OFF Stutter Dial Tone is not available

SW16

Note 1

ON Ringer Timer mode: Common mode

OFF Ringer Timer mode: Separate mode

Note 2

ON Pre-ringing is not available

OFF Pre-ringing is available

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 299

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are composed as follows.

SWITCH SETTING

SW01

(BNW0 - 7)

Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element corre-

sponds to circuits 0 - 7.

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464A)

For long distance

BNW: 600 Ω

For short distance

BNW2 (ON) BNW1 (OFF)

12345678

OFF

350Ω1000Ω

0.21 µ

600Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 300

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown

Figure 3-64.

Figure 3-64 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

PWR

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

21 3 2 1 3 21 31 2

231231 3

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 301

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

Figure 3-65 Connecting Route Diagram

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

Telephone

Rosette

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 302

Revision 1.0

PA-8LCBR

Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW10

SW01

(BNW 0 - 7)

SW11 Fixed

SW12 Fixed

SW13 Fixed

SW14

SW15

SW16

12 3 4 ON

12345678ON

1 2 ON

12ON

1 2 ON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 303

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

1. General Function

This circuit card provides the interface for 16 station lines. This circuit card is provided with functions for

supervising each user's call origination, call answering, release, detection of switch hook flashing, relaying

of DP/PB signals, transmission of ringing signals to the called side, and bothway transmissions of voice

band signals. For use of this circuit card, there are the following limitations.

(a) There are four kinds of balancing network, each of which is set up according to the line conditions

involved.

(b) PAD is only for receiving side 5 dB (at the time of station to station call).

Figure 3-66 Location of PA-16LCBE (16LC) Card in the System

TSW

16LC

COT

(MAX. 16 Stations)

C.O. Line

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 304

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

•The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 305

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown below.

Figure 3-67 Face Layout of PA-16LCBE (16LC)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is opening.

BL0

BL1S

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) to dial pulses at the time of an outgoing call or when the corresponding

circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

OPE

BL15

BL0

BNW8-15

BNW0-7

SW1

SW0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 306

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel.

SW0

1OFF ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3OFF ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 307

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

BNW0 ~ 7

1ON Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 0 Circuit ; For short distance.

2ON Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 1 Circuit ; For short distance.

3ON Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 2 Circuit ; For short distance.

4ON Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 3 Circuit ; For short distance.

5ON Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 4 Circuit ; For short distance.

6ON Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 5 Circuit ; For short distance.

7ON Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 6 Circuit ; For short distance.

8ON Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 7 Circuit ; For short distance.

Note: Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF.

However, when the station line is long (PBX -

Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting re-

ferring to the following table.

TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN

THE LINE RESISTANCE

BALANCING

NETWORK LINE

RESISTANCE SWITCH

Short Distance 0 ~ 100 ΩOFF

Long Distance More than 100 ΩON

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 308

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

BNW8 ~ 15

1ON Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 8 Circuit ; For short distance.

2ON Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 9 Circuit ; For short distance.

3ON Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 10 Circuit ; For short distance.

4ON Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 11 Circuit ; For short distance.

5ON Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 12 Circuit ; For short distance.

6ON Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 13 Circuit ; For short distance.

7ON Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 14 Circuit ; For short distance.

8ON Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For long distance.

OFF ×Balancing network of No. 15 Circuit ; For short distance.

Note: Normally, switches are all to be set to OFF.

However, when the station line is long (PBX -

Telephone Set), rearrange the switch setting

referring to the following table.

TERMINAL RESISTANCE IS NOT INCLUDED IN

THE LINE RESISTANCE

BALANCING

NETWORK LINE

RESISTANCE SWITCH

Short Distance 0 ~ 100 ΩOFF

Long Distance More than 100 ΩON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 309

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW1

1ON Polarity Reversal as Disconnect Signal

OFF ×Momentary Open as Disconnect Signal

2OFF ×Fixed

SW1-3 SW1-4 INTERRUPTED RINGER PATTERN

OFF

(standard)

OFF

(standard)

OFF ON

ON OFF

ON ON

0.4/0.2/0.4-ON/OFF/ON

• Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.4 0.4

0.2

2.0

• Rering

0.4 0.8

0.2

4.00.4

0.2

0.2/0.2/0.2/0.2-ON/OFF/ON/OFF/ON

• Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.2 0.2

0.2

2.0

• Rering

0.2 0.2

0.2

4.00.4

0.2

0.2 0.2

0.20.2

0.35/0.3/0.35-ON/OFF/ON

• Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.35 0.35

0.3

2.0

• Rering

0.35 0.7

0.3

4.00.35

0.3

0.2/0.4/0.2-ON/OFF/ON

• Incoming call from C. O. line/station

0.2 0.2

0.4

2.2

• Rering

0.2 0.2

0.4

4.2

0.2 0.4

0.2 0.2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 310

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW1

7ON Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF ×Stutter Dial Tone Not Available

8ON Pre-signaling is not performed.

OFF ×Pre-signaling is performed.

SW1-5 SW1-6 SWITCH SETTING FOR MW

LAMP CONTROLLING

OFF OFF In the case of lighting (normal setting)

OFF ON In the case of 60 IPM flashing

ON OFF In the case of lighting or flashing

(As controlled by the software)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 311

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in

Figure 3-68 below.

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

1212 12

12 1212

PWR

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 312

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

Figure 3-68 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

3 3 3 3 3 3

PWR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 313

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

Figure 3-69 Connecting Route Diagram

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

Ordinary Telephone

B0 Rosette

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 314

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBE

Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW0

SW1

BNW0-7

BNW8-15

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel.

ON 1234

ON 12345678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 315

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16LCBJ-A circuit card,which is exclusively used in a µ-law system, provides an interface between

a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resis-

tance.This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal

which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

Figure 3-70 Location of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC) Card in the System

PUBLIC C.O. Line

NETWORK

INT

COT

Local I/O Bus

CPU

max. 600 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

•Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

•Reverse Function : x 1 circuits

•Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp

(selectable)

•Encoding Law : µ-law.

(PA-16LC BJ-A)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 316

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 317

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-71.

Figure 3-71 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-A (16LC)

SW13

SW12

SW11

(BNW8-15) SW10

(BNW0-7)

OPE

SW00 (MB)

BL12-15

BL8-11

BL4-7

BL0-3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 318

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATUS MEANING

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating

normally.

BL0

BL15

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED

keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of

the ringing signal.

2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial

pulses from a line are being received, Busy

LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the

dial pulses coming from the line.

3)Line is in make-busy state.

Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 319

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy.

DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel.

SW10

(BNW0~7)

CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK

1ON No. 0 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

2ON No. 1 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

3ON No. 2 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

4ON No. 3 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

5ON No. 4 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

6ON No. 5 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

7ON No. 6 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

8ON No. 7 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 320

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING

MEANING

CIRCUIT NO. KIND OF BALANCING NETWORK

SW11

(BNW8~15)

1ON No. 8 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

2ON No. 9 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

3ON No. 10 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

4ON No. 11 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

5ON No. 12 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

6ON No. 13 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

7ON No. 14 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

8ON No. 15 Compromise

OFF ×600 Ω

SW12

1ON Immediate is not available.

OFF Immediate is available.

2ON Stutter dial tone is available

OFF Message Waiting Lamp is available

SW13 ON Momentary Open

OFF Polarity Reverse

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 321

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in

Figure 3-72.

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

1212 12

12 1212

PWR

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 322

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

Figure 3-72 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

3 3 3 3 3 3

PWR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 323

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

Figure 3-73 Connecting Route Diagram

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

Ordinary Telephone

B0 Rosette

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 324

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-A

Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB) UP : Circuit card make busy

SW10

(BNW 0 - 7)

SW11

(BNW 8 - 15)

SW12

SW13

012345 6 7 ON

01234567 ON

1 2 ON

OFF ON

(RVS) (OPEN)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 325

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16LCBJ-B circuit card, which is exclusively used in a µ-law system, provides an interface between

a maximum of 16 analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (0hm) inclusive of terminal

resistance.

This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which

has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

Figure 3-74 Location of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC) Card in the System

PUBLIC C.O. Line

NETWORK

INT

COT

Local I/O Bus

CPU

max. 600 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

•Loop Resistance : Max. 600 [Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

•Reverse Function : x 1 circuit

•Stutter Dial Tone / Message Waiting Lamp

•Encoding Law : µ-law

(PA-16LC BJ-B)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 326

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 327

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps and switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-75.

Figure 3-75 Face Layout of PA-16LCBJ-B (16LC)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP

NAME COLOR STATE MEANING

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

BL0

BL15

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1)Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in syn-

chronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2)Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are be-

ing received, Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial

pulses coming from the line.

3)Line is in make-busy state.

Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

OPE

BL15

SW10

SW11

SW13

SW15

SW16

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 328

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16LC BJ-B card have the following meanings.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00(MB) UP Card make-busy

(Inserted state)

DOWN Card make-busy cancel

(Operating state)

SW13

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2ON Stutter dial tone is available

OFF ×Stutter dial tone is not available

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW15

1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

ON Message waiting lamp flashes

(1-sec. ON/1-sec. OFF)

OFF ×Message waiting lamp lights or flashes

(controlled by software)

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW16 ON Momentary open

OFF ×Polarity reverse

1 2 3 4

1234

OFF

(RVS) ON

(OPEN)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 329

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are composed as follows.

SWITCH NAME SETTING

SW-10

(BNW0 - 7) Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element

corresponds to

circuits 0 - 7.

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464A)

for long distance

BNW: 600 Ω

for short distance

SW-11

(BNW8 - 15) Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element

corresponds to

circuits 8 - 15.

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464A)

for long distance

BNW: 600 Ω

for short distance

ON OFF

123456 7 8

OFF

▼

OFF

▼

12 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

▼

OFF

▼

compromise impedance (EIA/TIA-464A)

350Ω1000Ω

0.21 µ

600Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 330

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in

Figure 3-76.

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

1212 12

12 1212

PWR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 331

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

Figure 3-76 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

3 3 3 3 3 3

PWR

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 332

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

Figure 3-77 Connecting Route Diagram

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

Telephone

Rosette

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 333

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBJ-B

Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW13

SW15

SW16

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

12 3 4 ON

1 2 3 4 ON

OFF ON

(RVS) (OPEN)

01234567ON

012345 6 7 ON

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 334

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and

the system with a range of 1200 inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial

Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition momentary open/reverse battery function is

provided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card.

Figure 3-78 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System

max. 1200 [Ω]

COT

INT SW

I/O Local Bus

(PA-16LCBW)

C. O. line

Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of

terminal Resistance)

Open Function: x 15 circuits

Reverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable)

Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)

Encoding Law: µ-law

•

PUBLIC

NETWORK

Analog Terminal

CPU

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 335

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-79.

Figure 3-79 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC)

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

OPE

BL15

BL0

SW00 (MB)

SW10

SW16

SW11

SW14

SW17

SW18

SW15

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 336

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME LAMP

COLOR LAMP STATUS MEANING OF INDICATION

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

BL0

BL15

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in

synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are

being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with

the dial pulses coming from the line.

3) Line is in make-busy state.

Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 337

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings.

Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600 Ω.

(For North America, Other Country (µ Law))

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB) Circuit Card

Make-busy Key

ON Circuit card make-busy

OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel

(Normal operating mode)

SW10

(BNW0-7)

Balancing

Network

Designation

• Each element on

this switch

corresponds to

circuit #0-#7.

North America, Other Country (µ Law)

BNW : Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464B) (Note)

for long distance.

OFF

North America, Other Country (µ Law)

BNW : 600

Ω (Note)

for short distance

ON OFF

12345678

OFF

350 1000

0.21µ

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)

600

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 338

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

SWITCH SWITCH

No. FUNCTION SWITCH

SETTING MEANING

SW11

(BNW8-15)

Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element on this

switch corresponds to

circuit #8-#15.

(This same as previous page)

SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2ONFixed to ON

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2ON Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 339

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3Message Waiting

Lamp

Message Waiting Lamp

Flashing

(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lit or

Flashing (Selected and

Controlled by Software)

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW18

Polarity reverse or

Momentary Open

(circuit #15 Only )

ON Momentary open

OFF Polarity reverse

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

Slide switch

(RVS) (OPEN)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 340

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-80.

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-81).

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

121 21 2 1 21 21 2

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

Highway Block

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 341

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

Figure 3-80 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

3 3 3 3 3 3

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

Highway Block

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 342

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

Figure 3-81 Connecting Route Diagram

PBX MDF

Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 343

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBW

Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

12345678

1234

OFF

(RVS) (OPEN)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 344

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and

the system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter

Dial Tone”, which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition polarity reverse function is provided for 16

channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card.

Note: The PA-16LCBY card requires Series 7400 or later software.

Figure 3-82 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots.

max. 1200 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

COT

RST

TSW/INT

(PA-8RSTY)

CPU GT

Local I/O Bus

(PA-16LCBY)

C. O. LINE

• Loop Resistance : Max 1200[Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

• Reverse Function : x 16 circuits

• Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable)

• Encoding Law : µ-law

PUBLIC

NETWORK

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 345

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-83.

Figure 3-83 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card

OPE

BL15

BL0

SW00

(MB)

SW10

(BNW0-7) SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW19

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 346

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings.

LAMP NAME LAMP

COLOR LAMP STATUS MEANING OF INDICATION

OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally.

BL0

BL15

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing

in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are

being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with

the dial pulses coming from the line.

3) Line is in make-busy state.

Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB) Circuit Card

Make-busy Key

OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel

ON Circuit card make-busy

SW10

(BNW0-7)

Balancing

Network

Designation

•Each element on

this switch

corresponds to

circuit #0-#7.

When this switch

has been set, see

SW14.

North America, Other Country (µ Law)

BNW : Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464B) (Note )

for long distance

OFF North America, Other Country (µ Law)

BNW : 600

Ω (Note )

for short distance

12345678

OFF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 347

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW11

(BNW8-15)

Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element on this

switch corresponds

to circuit #8-#15.

[the same as previous page]

SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2ONFixed to ON

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW15

North America

Brazil

China

Other Country

OFF Fixed to OFF

PAD (Australia Only)

ON NEAX 2400 PAD

PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB

OFF ICS-PBX PAD

PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB

2ON Stutter Dial Tone Available

OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 348

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW17 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3Message Waiting

Lamp

Message Waiting Lamp

Flashing

(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lit or

Flashing (Selected and

Controlled by Software)

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW19 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3ONFixed to ON

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 349

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

Note: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω.

(For North America, Other Country (µ Law))

ON OFF

350 1000

0.21µ

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464B)

600

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 350

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-84.

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

121 21 2 1 21 21 2

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

Highway Block

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 351

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

Figure 3-84 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

3 3 3 3 3 3

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

Highway Block

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 352

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

Figure 3-85 Connecting Route Diagram

PBX MDF

Jack Analog Terminal

Maximum 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 353

Revision 1.0

PA-16LCBY

Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB) Note: Normal operating mode is down.

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW19

12345678

1234

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 354

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

1. General Function

The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the Dterm and the IPX. Depending on the

switch settings, this card works in the following two modes.

•16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications

only)

•8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice

and data communications)

Figure 3-86 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System

There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP-

3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for Dterm Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJ

PROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the Dterm performance depending

on each firmware EPROM.

Table 3-3 Performance

FIRMWARE Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III

SP-3295

16ELC J

PROG-B

•24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

•Month and year (last two digits) also displayed following

the time and date.

•Software keys are available and the software keys are con-

trolled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed

by office data.

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software key is not available.

SP-3270

16ELC J

PROG-A

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software keys are available. However, key function is

fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset).

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software key is not available.

Dterm #0

DTE

Data Adapter

Dterm #7

DTE

Data Adapter

Dterm #0

Dterm #15

IMX IMX

16 ELC MODE 8 DLC MODE

ELC

IPX

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 355

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-87.

Figure 3-87 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Mounting Module PIM

PALM

SW00 (MB)

BL15

OPE

BL0

SW01

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 356

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.

i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to the

PA-16ELCJ card whose PALM is on.

ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.

iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute.

iv) Connect the Dterm again.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.

OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal.

PALM Red Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note

OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.

BL0

BL15

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been

assigned.

OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 357

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00 (MB)

Circuit Card Make-

busy key

Circuit card Make-busy Cancel.

Circuit card Make-busy.

SW01

See Table 3-4 below.

—Always ON (fixed).

ELC/DLC

mode

Designation

16ELC mode.

8DLC mode.

Table 3-4 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7

ON OFF

ON •16 sets of Dterms per card.

•Voice Communication only.

•8 sets of Dterms per card.

•Data Adapter is used.

OFF

•16 sets of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the

same time.

•8 sets of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and

Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

12345678

1ON

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1ON

2345678

OFF

123456 7 8 ON

OFF

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

SW01-7

SW01-1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 358

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

6. External Interface

Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT

connectors as follows.

•6ELC mode

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

B1 A0

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

121 21 2 1 21 21 2

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 359

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

•16ELC mode

Figure 3-88 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B1 A0

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B5 A4

B9 A8

A10

A11

B10

B11

B12

B13 A12

A13

A14

A15

B14

B15

3 3 3 3 3 3

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 360

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ

Electric Line Current

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW01

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 361

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between Dterm and IPX. Depending upon the

switch settings, this card works in the following two modes.

•16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications

only)

•8 DLC mode: A maximum of eight sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice

and data communications)

Figure 3-89 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System

Table 3-5 Performance

Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III

•24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD).

•Month and year is displayed following the time and date.

•Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the

system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data.

•16 digits wide of LCD.

•Month and year are not displayed.

•Software key is not available.

Dterm #0

DTE

Data Adapter

Dterm #7

DTE

Data Adapter

Dterm #0

Dterm #15

IPX IPX

16 ELC MODE 8 DLC MODE

ELC

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 362

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-90.

Figure 3-90 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

PALM

SW00 (MB)

BL15

OPE

SW10 SW11

BL0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 363

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions.

i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit to all lines belonging to the

PA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on.

ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm.

iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least one minute.

iv) Connect the Dterm again.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while on-line operations are normal.

OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal.

PALM Red Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note

OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal.

BL0

BL15

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been

assigned.

OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 364

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00 (MB)

Circuit Card Make-

busy key

Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel.

Circuit Card Make-busy.

SW10

LP-PM

Interface

mode setting

When firmware SP-3419 is used, and your

system uses software Series 7300 Release 7 or

earlier.

Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is

not available.

When firmware SP-3514 is used, and your

system uses software Series 7400 Release 8 or

later.

Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is

available.

2—Not used.

3-4 ELC/DLC

mode setting

This circuit card is operated in 16 ELC mode.

This circuit card is operated in 8 DLC mode.

Do not set another combination.

Analog Port

Adapter

setting

Analog Port Adapter is available.

Analog Port Adapter is not available.

6-8 —Fixed to “OFF”.

SW11

1-8 —Fixed to all “OFF”.

Details

are shown

in the next

table.

1ON

2345678

OFF

1ON

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1ON

2345678

OFF

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

OFF

123456 7 8 ON

OFF

1ON

23456 7 8

OFF

1ON

23456 7 8

OFF

1ON

2345678

OFF

1ON

23456 7 8

OFF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 365

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON

SW10-5: OFF •16 set of Dterms per card.

•Voice Communication only.

•8 set of Dterms per card.

•Data Adapter is used.

SW10-5: ON

•16 set of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or

Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

•8 set of Dterms per card.

•Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and

Analog terminal can be used at the same time).

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 366

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT

connectors as follows.

•16ELC mode

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

1212 12

12 1212

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 367

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

Figure 3-91 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 ConnectorLT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

3 3 3 3 3 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 368

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

•8DLC mode

Figure 3-92 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B4 A4

B5 A5

B6 A6

B7 A7

21 3 2 1 3 21 31 2

231231 3

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 369

Revision 1.0

PA-16ELCJ-B

Electronic Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

SW10

SW11

12345678ON

123456 7 8 ON

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 370

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

1. General Function

This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The Fusion-

Link-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Once

the FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it to

the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel

(or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface.

Figure 3-93 Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System

BWB

CPU

LP-PM

INT

ETHER NET

CONT

HDLC

CONT

D/I

CONT DTI

CONT

DTI

HUB

(PA-M96)

LANI

(PZ-PC19)

CPU

CPR

TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE

RJ-45

FRONT CABLE

Note

FCH

Note: This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 371

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

2. Mounting Location/ Condition

The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-94.

Figure 3-94 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

PIM

Universal Slots

OPE

EST3

EST2

EST1

EST0

PWALM

LYR

LOAD

MNT

10-BASE-T

MODE

DTI

FCH

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SW14

SW13

SW12

SW11

SW10

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 372

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

LYR

Green Remains lit while the Fusion link is established.

Flash Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM)

OFF Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test

result is not fair.

LB Green Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use.

OFF Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready.

LOAD

Green Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.

(Forwarding Status)

Flash

(60 IPM)

Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets.

(Blocking Status)

Flash

(120 IPM)

Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.

(Learning Status)

OFF Remains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets.

(Null Status)

EST3 Green Remains lit while sending data.

EST2 Green Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal.

EST1 Green Remains lit while receiving data.

EST0 Green Remains lit while the link is established.

PWALM Red Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 373

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

5. Switch setting

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: The following operations are required prior to extracting the card.

(1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch.

(2.) Flip the MB switch.

When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable.

Note: T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, the

shorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

Note

UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

MNT

0OFF ×Not used.

1OFF ×Not used.

2OFF ×Not used.

Note

ON Make-busy-request.

OFF ×Cancel the Make-busy-request.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

MODE

0 - 7 Not used.

8×Standard setting.

(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)

9Fusion link test mode.

(When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.)

A - F Not used.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW10

Note

ON T203 timer value is variable.

OFF ×T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds.

2~8 OFF ×Not used.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 374

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW11

Note 1

1ON

This SW designates the D/I channel of the

Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for

denial.

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

4ON

OFF

5ON

OFF

6ON

OFF

7ON

OFF

8ON

OFF

SW11 D/I channel of T1

SW11-1 CH 0

SW11-2 CH 1

SW11-3 CH2

SW11-4 CH 3

SW11-5 CH 4

SW11-6 CH 5

SW11-7 CH 6

SW11-8 CH 7

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 375

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

Note 1: When “n” is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network.

When “n” is one or more, the corresponding D channels as “n” must be designated by SW11-SW12.

SW12

Note 1

1ON This SW designates the D/I channel of the

Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for

denial.

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

4ON

OFF

5ON

OFF

6ON

OFF

7ON

OFF

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW12 D/I channel of T1

SW12-1 CH 8

SW12-2 CH 9

SW12-3 CH 10

SW12-4 CH 11

SW12-5 CH 12

SW12-6 CH 13

SW12-7 CH 14

SW12-8 CH 15

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 376

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW13

1ON This SW designates the D/I channel of the

Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n)

Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for

denial.

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

4ON

OFF

5ON

OFF

6ON

OFF

7ON

OFF

8ON

OFF

SW14

1ON ×Positive logic for the D/I CONT

OFF Negative logic for the D/I CONT

Note 2

ON ×The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface.

OFF

Note 2

ON ×

OFF

Note 3

ON Link Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link

performs as the “network.”

OFF LAPD signal link performs as the “user.”

SW13 D/I channel of T1

SW13-1 CH 16

SW13-2 CH 17

SW13-3 CH 18

SW13-4 CH 19

SW13-5 CH 20

SW13-6 CH 21

SW13-7 CH 22

SW13-8 CH 23

SW14-2 SW14-3 SPEED

ON ON 64 Kbps × n

ON OFF 56 Kbps × n

OFF ON 48 Kbps × n

OFF OFF Not used

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 377

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface.

Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing.

Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero Code

Suppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing).

Note 3: When a node is set “network,” the distant node over the fusion link should be set “user,” and vice versa.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 378

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

6. External Interface

The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown below.

Figure 3-95 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection

24DTRFCH

10AL (10) FLT CA

10 BASE-T

straight cable

DTI

FCH CN2

HUB

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 379

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

See Figure 3-96 when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a cascade con-

nection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection.

One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCH

card, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5)

FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card.

As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection.

(a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card)

(b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card)

Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. (Note)

Figure 3-96 FCH Cascade Connection

Note: A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1’ 7.6 ”).

24DTR FCH FCH FCH

Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH Note

To the next

FCH/CCH/DCH

CN2

DTI

FCH

DTI

FCH

DTI

FCH

To HUB

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 380

Revision 1.0

PA-FCHA

Fusion Call Control Handler

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

MNT

MODE

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

OFF

1 2 3 4 ON

5 6 7 8

1234ON

5678

1234ON

5678

1234 ON

56 7 8

1 2 3 4 ON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 381

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and the

system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial

Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp

(MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required.

Figure 3-97 Location of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card in the System

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.

max. 600 [Ω]

Analog Terminal

COT

INT SW

CPU GT

I/O Local Bus

(PA-24LCBV)

C. O. LINE

• Loop Resistance : Max 600[Ω]

(inclusive of terminal resistance)

• Reverse Function : x 1 circuit

• Stutter Dial Tone

• Message Waiting Lamp

• Encoding Law : µ-law

PUBLIC

NETWORK

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 382

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-98.

Figure 3-98 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV (LC) Card

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this card are shown below.

LED NAME COLOR LED STATUS DESCRIPTION

OPE1 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of circuit #0-#7 is operating normally.

OPE2 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of circuit #8-#23 is operating normally.

BL0

BL23

Green

Steady Lighting Line loop exists.

Flashing

1. Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in

synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal.

2. Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are

being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the

dial pulses coming from the line.

3. Line is in Make-busy state.

4. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm.

OPE2

OPE1

BL23

BL0

SW00 (MB)

BL23

SW18

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW12

(BNW16-23)

SW17

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 383

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on the PA-24LCBV (LC) card have the following meanings.

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB) Circuit Card

Make-busy Key

OFF Circuit card Make-busy cancel

ON Circuit card Make-busy

SW10

(BNW0-7)

Balancing Network

Designation

•Each element on

this switch

corresponds to

circuit #0-#7.

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)

BNW: Compromise Impedance

(EIA/TIA-464A) (Note 1)

for long distance.

OFF

North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)

BNW : 600 Ω (Note 1)

for short distance

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW11

(BNW8-15)

Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element

on this switch

corresponds to

circuit #8-#15.

The same as previous table.

SW12

(BMW16-23)

Balancing Network

Designation

• Each element

on this switch

corresponds to

circuit #16-#23.

The same as previous table.

SW13

Selection of the User

SW13

-1

SW13

-2

SW13

-3

SW13

-4 North America

ON OFF OFF OFF

SW14 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2Stutter

Dial Tone

ON Stutter Dial tone Available

OFF Stutter Dial tone not Available

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

12345678

OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 384

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600 Ω are as follows.

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW16

1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3Message Waiting

Lamp

Message Waiting Lamp

Flashing

(Controlled by Firmware)

OFF

Message Waiting Lamp lit or

Flashing (Selected and Controlled

by Software)

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

SW17

1 OFF Fixed to OFF

2 OFF Fixed to OFF

3 OFF Fixed to OFF

4 OFF Fixed to OFF

5 OFF Fixed to OFF

6 OFF Fixed to OFF

7 OFF Fixed to OFF

8 OFF Fixed to OFF

SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW18

Polarity reverse or

Momentary Open

ON Momentary open

OFF Polarity reverse

ON OFF

1234

OFF

1234

OFF

12345678

OFF

Slide switch

(RVS) (OPEN)

350 1000

0.21

Compromise Impedance(EIA/TIA-464A)

600

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 385

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB) Note: Normal operating mode is down.

SW10

(BNW0-7)

SW11

(BNW8-15)

SW12

(BNW16-23)

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

SW18

1234ON

5678

12 3 4 ON

56 7 8

1 2 3 4 ON

5 6 7 8

1ON

2 3 4

1ON

2 3 4

1ON

2 3 4

1ON

2 3 4

1 2 3 4 ON

5 6 7 8

OFF

(RVS) (OPEN)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 386

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

7. External Interface

Location of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-99.

(a) PIM

When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows.

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (1/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 1 Accommodated in 2

LT 5, 11 ConnectorLT 4, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

B18

B19

B20

B21

B22

B23

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15 B8

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

B16

B17

B18

B19

B20

B21

B22

B23

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

1 2 1 2

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 387

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

Figure 3-99 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) (2/2)

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 5, 11 ConnectorLT 4, 10 Connector

B10

B11

B12

B13

B14

B15

A10

A11

A12

A13

A14

A15

B16

B17

B18

B19

B20

B21

B22

B23

A16

A17

A18

A19

A20

A21

A22

A23

3 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 388

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

(b) LC Connector Leads

Figure 3-100 LC Connector Lead Location (LC Cable)

LC CABLE

LC Connector (1)

CONN1 Champ Connector

LC Connector (2)

CONN2

LC Connector (3)

CONN3

PKG1

PKG2

PKG3

PKG1

PKG2

PKG3

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 389

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

8. Connecting Route Diagram

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows.

A and B leads for channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector located on the front edge of the card.

Figure 3-101 Connecting Route Diagram

MDF

Jack

Analog

Terminal

Analog

Terminal

Analog

Terminal

Analog

Terminal

A23

B23

PBX

LT Connector

Installation

Cable

Maximum 600 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance)

Installation Cable

LT Connector

LC Cable

PA-24LCBV

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 390

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

9. LC Cable Connection

Figure 3-102 Outer View of LC Cable

Earth Cable

3m (9.8 feet)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 391

Revision 1.0

PA-24LCBV

Line Circuit

Figure 3-103 Cable Running for LC Cable (Example)

FRONT

REAR

LC Cable

LC Cable LC Cable

LT Cable

PA-24LCBV

Earth Plate

Earth Cable

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 392

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

1. General Function

This circuit card executes a C.O. line to the telephone or the release of a C.O. line due to a power supply

failure, system down, software order, etc. This circuit card is also provided with the change circuit of 12

circuits.

Figure 3-104 Location of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU) within the System

TEL

MDF

TEL

(AO, BO)

MDF

(AI, BI)

LC TSW COT MDF

TRK

(TI, RI)

NCU

MDF

(TO, RO)

(NITE KEY)

Position within the System

ATTCON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 393

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

PIM

Mounting Module

PA-M69

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1918 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 394

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

3. Face Layout of Lamp, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamp, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-105.

Figure 3-105 Face Layout of PA-M69 (PFT, 12NCU)

4. Lamp Indication

The contents of lamp indication of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit even when PFT is being activated on any one of the 12 circuits.

OPE

NCU1

NCU0

SW0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 395

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW0

1ON ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3OFF ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 396

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card, accommodation of the NCU connector on

the front side of the circuit card, and connecting route diagram are shown in Figure 3-106.

Figure 3-106 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

50 24

KY1

KY3 KY0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 6 Connector

KY2

KY4

KY6

KY5

KY7

1 1

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Highway Block

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 397

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

Figure 3-107 NCU Connector Accommodation

NCU Connector Accommodation

NCU0

BO00

BI00

TO00

TI00

BO01

BI01

TO01

TI01

BO02

BI02

TO02

TI02

BO03

BI03

TO03

TI03

BO04

BI04

TO04

TI04

BO05

BI05

TO05

TI05

AO00

AI00

RO00

RI00

AO01

AI01

RO01

RI01

AO02

AI02

RO02

RI02

AO03

AI03

RO03

RI03

AO04

AI04

RO04

RI04

AO05

AI05

RO05

RI05

CHAMP Connector

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

No. 0

No. 1

No. 2

No. 3

No. 4

No. 5

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

NCU1

BO06

BI06

TO06

TI06

BO07

BI07

TO07

TI07

BO08

BI08

TO08

TI08

BO09

BI09

TO09

TI09

BO10

BI10

TO10

TI10

BO11

BI11

TO11

TI11

AO06

AI06

RO06

RI06

AO07

AI07

RO07

RI07

AO08

AI08

RO08

RI08

AO09

AI09

RO09

RI09

AO10

AI10

RO10

RI10

AO11

AI11

RO11

RI11

CHAMP Connector

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

TEL

TRK

No. 6

No. 7

No. 8

No. 9

No. 10

No. 11

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

Station

C.O. Line

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 398

Revision 1.0

PA-M69

Power Failure Transfer

Figure 3-108 Connecting Route Diagram

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM SW0

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

NEAX2400 IPX

MDF

KY7

Front Connector NCU

KY0

KY7

KY0

COT

External

Key Box

C.O. Line

AO00

BO00

AI00

BI00

RO00

TO00

RI00

TI00

Station

PFT

ON 1 2 3 4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 399

Revision 1.0

PA-M96

HUB

PA-M96

HUB

1. General Function

This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the

10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card.

As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI)

and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards.

Figure 3-109 Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System

CPU LANI

(PZ-PC19)

CPR #0

CPU LANI

(PZ-PC19)

CPR #1

TO/FROM

THE OTHER FUSION

NODE

TO/FROM

THE OTHER FUSION

NODE

DTI

FCH

HUB

(PA-M96)

HUB

(PA-M96)

10BASE-T cross cable is used

for cascade connection

10BASE-T straight cable

Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 400

Revision 1.0

PA-M96

HUB

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-110.

Figure 3-110 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

PIM0

Universal Slots Universal Slots

OPE

CRS7

CRS0

SENS

TP7-X

TP6-X

TP5-X

TP4-X

TP3-X

TP2-X

TP1-X

TP0-X

ST7

ST0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 401

Revision 1.0

PA-M96

HUB

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normally

regardless of the cable polarity.

Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048 bit-

times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until the

collision is over.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

CRS0~CRS7 Green Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port.

ST0~ST7 Green

The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as

shown in the table below.

SEL SWITCH MEANINGS

0Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port is

reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1

Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the TPn-X

port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp may light

regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n = 0~7)

Lights when the TPn-X port is normal.

Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port.

(n = 0~7) Note 2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 402

Revision 1.0

PA-M96

HUB

5. Switch Setting

Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING DESCRIPTION

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

SENSE

0 Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7).

1 Not used.

2×TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7).

3Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports

(n = 0~7).

4 - F Not used.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 403

Revision 1.0

PA-M96

HUB

6. External Interface

Figure 3-111 FCH/HUB/DTI/LANI Connection

24DTR

CN2

FCH

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

10 BASE-T straight Cable

HUB

10AL (10) FLT CA

DTI

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 404

Revision 1.0

PA-M96

HUB

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SEL

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 405

Revision 1.0

PA-M103

HUB

PA-M103

HUB

1. General Function

This circuit card is a class II HUB card based on IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)/IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX),

which is located between 100M Ether card (PZ-PC22/PZ-PC23) and FCCH card that establishes Fusion

link to the system.

This circuit card provides the repeater function, and 12 ports 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX are accommodated

on one HUB card. The state of each port is indicated on the LED.

This card is used in IPX-UMG system.

Figure 3-112 Location of PA-M103 (HUB) Card in the System

LAN CPU

LP#0

LAN CPU

CMP#0

LAN

CPU

SP#0

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

HUB

FCCH DTI

LANCPU

LP#1

LANCPU

CMP#1

LAN

CPU

SP#1

10BASE-T

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

100BASE-TX

(P-BUS)

HUB

FCCHDTI

To other Fusion Node

NIC

MAT

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 406

Revision 1.0

PA-M103

HUB

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-M103 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM as shown below.

3. Face Layout of Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-113.

Figure 3-113 Face layout of PA-M103 (HUB) Card

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots Universal Slots

Note: Related to the length of Ether cable, it is recommended that this card ought to be mounted on the PIM

within IMG0/4/8/12 (LPR accommodated IMGs).

TPB

TPA

TP9

TP8

TP7

TP6

TP5

TP4

TP3

TP2

TP1

TP0

LA L9

L8 L7

L6 L2

L1 L0

L5 L4

OPEPWALM

TXRX

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 407

Revision 1.0

PA-M103

HUB

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

No switch settings are required.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation

PWALM Red Lights when the OBP (On Board Power) output voltage blownout

L0-L9, LA, LB Green Link has been established

TXRX Green Data packet sending/receiving

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 408

Revision 1.0

PA-M103

HUB

6. External Interface

Figure 3-114 External Interface for PA-M103 (HUB) Card

7. Switch Setting Sheet

No switch settings are required.

PZ-PC22(LANI)

HUB

100 BASE-TX Straight Cable

(PA-M103)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 409

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

1. General Function

This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card which transmits and sends selective signals (DP

signals, PB signals, MF signals).

Figure 3-115 Location of PA-8RSTK (8RST) within the System

ATT

COT

TLT

TSW

ATI

Station

C.O. Line

Tie Line

RST

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 410

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 411

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-116.

Figure 3-116 Face Layout of PA-8RSTK (8RST)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BLR0

BLR7

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS0

BLS7

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

OPE

N-OPE

BLS7

BLS4

MBS7

MBS4

BLR7

BLR4

MBR7

MBR4

BLS3

BLS0

MBS3

MBS0

BLR3

BLR0

MBR3

MBR0

SW0

SW1

~~~

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 412

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel.

MBR0~3

0ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

2ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

3ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBR4~7

4ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

5ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

6ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 413

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MBR4~7 7 ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBS0~3

0ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

2ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

3ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBS4~7

4ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

5ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

6ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

7ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 414

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW0

OFF

7OFF×Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).

8ON×Fixed.

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON ON ON -21.7 dBm0

OFF ON ON -23.7 dBm0

ON OFF ON -25.7 dBm0

OFF OFF ON -27.7 dBm0

ON ON OFF -28.7 dBm0

OFF ON OFF -31.7 dBm0

ON OFF OFF -33.7 dBm0

OFF OFF OFF -35.7 dBm0

SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

SW0-4 SW0-5 SW0-6 MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON ON ON -21 dBm0

OFF ON ON -23 dBm0

ON OFF ON -25 dBm0

OFF OFF ON -27 dBm0

ON ON OFF -28 dBm0

OFF ON OFF -31 dBm0

ON OFF OFF -33 dBm0

OFF OFF OFF -35 dBm0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 415

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW1

1ON MFR Receive Specification; AT&T

OFF MFR Receive Specification; CCITT No. 5

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut

Down Protect Timer)

SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)

OFF

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut

Down Protect Timer)

LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

3OFF×Fixed

4ON Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of MFR.

OFF Register Selection; REG0, 1, 4, 5 of PBR.

5ON Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of MFR.

OFF Register Selection; REG2, 3, 6, 7 of PBR.

6ON ×DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.

OFF DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.

7OFF×No setting (Fixed to OFF)

8OFF×Fixed

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 416

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTK

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

MBR0-3

MBR4-7

MBS0-3

MBS4-7

SW0

SW1

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

ON 12345678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 417

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

1. General Function

This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP sig-

nals, PB signals, MF signals).

Figure 3-117 Location of the PA-8RSTM (8RST) Card in the System

ATT

COT

TLT

TSW

ATI

Station

C.O. Line

Tie Line

RST

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 418

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below.

Figure 3-118 Face Layout of PA-8RSTM (8RST)

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

Mounting Module PIM

OPE

BLS7

BLS4

MBS7

MBS4

BLR7

BLR4

MBR7

MBR4

BLS3

BLS0

MBS3

MBS0

BLR3

BLR0

MBR3

MBR0

SW11

~~~

SW10

SW04

SW03

SW02

SW01

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 419

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BLR0

BLR7

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS0

BLS7

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state.

OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy.

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel.

MBR0~3

(SW01)

0ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

2ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

3ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBR4~7

(SW03)

4ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

5ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

6ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 420

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MBR4~7

(SW03) 7ON Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBS0~3

(SW02)

0ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

1ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

2ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

3ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

MBS4~7

(SW04)

4ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

5ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

6ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

7ON Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit.

OFF ×Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 421

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10

ON ×

OFF

ON ×

OFF

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

7OFF×Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF).

8ON×Fixed.

SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 PBR THRESHOLD VALUE

ON ON ON -21 dBm0

OFF ON ON -23 dBm0

ON OFF ON -25 dBm0

OFF OFF ON -27 dBm0

ON ON OFF -29 dBm0 (standard setting)

OFF ON OFF -31 dBm0

ON OFF OFF -33 dBm0

OFF OFF OFF -35 dBm0

SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE

SW10-4 SW10-5 SW10-6 MFR THRESHOLD

VALUE

ON ON ON -17 dBm0

OFF ON ON -19 dBm0

ON OFF ON -21 dBm0

OFF OFF ON -23 dBm0 (standard setting)

ON ON OFF -25 dBm0

OFF ON OFF -27 dBm0

ON OFF OFF -29 dBm0

OFF OFF OFF -31 dBm0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 422

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11

1ON MFR Receive Specification; AT&T

OFF MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut

Down Protect Timer)

SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.)

OFF

PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut

Down Protect Timer)

LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.)

3OFF×Fixed

4ON Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR.

OFF Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR.

5ON Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR.

OFF Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR.

6ON ×DPR Receive Specification; General Spec.

OFF DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec.

7OFF×No setting (Fixed to OFF)

8OFF×Fixed

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 423

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTM

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

MBR0-3

(SW01)

MBR4-7

(SW03)

MBS0-3

(SW02)

MBS4-7

(SW04)

SW10

SW11

MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel

ON 12345678

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 424

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

1. General Function

The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, this

card contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensions

and/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sending

digits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has “Register Sender” function, by which inter-

digit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa without

intervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service.

Note: The PA-8RSTY card requires Series 7400 or later software.

Figure 3-119 Location of PA-8RSTY (8RST) within the System

GTCPU

TSWINT INT

PB line

PBR

DPR

DPS

PBS

I/O Local Bus

DP Telephone

Caller ID signals

NETWORK

PA-8RSTY

OFF HOOK

(LC for Calling

Number Delivery)

PBR:

PBS:

DPR:

DPS:

Push Button Receiver

PB Signal Sender

Dial Pulse Register

Dial Pulse Sender

PB Signal

DP Signal

OGT

This figure shows “Register Sender” function as an example.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 425

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-120.

Note: Layout of Lamps and switches differ from other RST cards.

Figure 3-120 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (8RST)

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

03 04

05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

ISWM

DUMMY

FANU

CMP

PH-PC43 (EMA)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT) PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-PC23

(LANI)

PZ-PC19

(LANI)

PZ-PC19

(LANI)

PZ-PC23

(LANI)

PZ-PC23

(LANI) PZ-PC23

(LANI)

PH-DK10 (DSPC)

PH-IO24 (IOC)

PWRSW0 (PH-PW14)

PWRSW1 (PH-PW14)

HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)

HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES)

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

TSW00 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW01 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW02 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW03 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW10 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW11 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW12 (PU-SW00-A)

TSW13 (PU-SW00-A)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

PH-IO24 (IOC) Note

00 01 02 03 04

PH-PC43 (EMA)

PZ-GT13

(ISAGT) PZ-GT13

(ISAGT)

PZ-M565

(ISAGTA)

PZ-M565

(ISAGTA)

PZ-PC22

(LANI)

PZ-ME44

(MEM) PZ-ME44

(MEM)

PZ-PC22

(LANI)

PZ-PC22

(LANI) PZ-PC22

(LANI)

PH-M22 (MMC)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 426

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BLR0

BLR7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

BLS0

BLS7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals.

Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 427

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITC

H NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(SW00)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01

(MBR0-7) 0ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

1ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

2ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

3ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

4ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

5ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

6ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

7ON Register make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

SW02

(MBS0-7) 0ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

1ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

2ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

3ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

4ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

5ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

6ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

7ON Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit

OFF ×Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 428

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW10

DTMF Signal Receiver

Threshold Value [Standard Setting]

4OFF Fixed to OFF

SW11

MFR Signal Receiver

Threshold Value [Standard Setting]

4OFF Fixed to OFF

1234

1234 ON

OFF

Selection of PBR Threshold Value

SW10-

1SW10-

2SW10-

3DTMF Threshold Value

OFF

-21.0 dBm0

-23.0 dBm0

-25.0 dBm0

-27.0 dBm0

-29.0 dBm0

-31.0 dBm0

-33.0 dBm0

-35.0 dBm0

1234

123 4 ON

OFF

Selection of MFR Threshold Value

SW11-

1SW11-

2SW11-

3MFR Threshold Value

OFF

-17.0 dBm0

-19.0 dBm0

-21.0 dBm0

-23.0 dBm0

-25.0 dBm0

-27.0 dBm0

-29.0 dBm0

-31.0 dBm0

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 429

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING

SW12

Designation of MFR

Specification •AT & T specification

•ITU-T No. 5 specification

DTMF Signal

Cut-off Guard Timer •SHORT (less than 10 ms)

[Standard Setting]

•

LONG (less than 20 ms)

(MFR/PBR) •REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR.

•REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR.

(MFR/PBR) •REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR.

•REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR.

1234

123 4

1234

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 430

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW13 1ON MF Transmission Level:-9dBm

OFF MF Transmission Level:-5dBm

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW14 1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW15 1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW16 1ON ×Fixed to ON

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

SW17 1OFF ×Fixed to OFF

2OFF ×Fixed to OFF

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 431

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

(MB)

Circuit card make busy cancel

Standard Setting : Down

SW01

(MBR0-7)

SW02

(MBS0-7)

SW10

SW11

ON 2 3 4

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 432

Revision 1.0

PA-8RSTY

PIM

SW12

SW13

SW14

SW15

SW16

SW17

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

ON 2 3 4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 433

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.

This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the

PA-SDTB card.

Figure 3-121 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System

F u s i o n

Node-A

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Link (Data Link)

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

Internal LAN

FCH

Node-B

Internal LAN

FCH

Fusion Link with FCCH

Fusion Link without FCCH

F u s i o n

Node-A

Internal LAN

Node-B

) SDT: SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 434

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When this

card is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB.

Mounting conditions are shown below.

•Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).

•This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables.

•For single configuration: SDT CABLEB <S>

•For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA <D>

•Fiber optic cables are connected to this card.

•Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and

TSW.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots Universal Slots

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 435

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example: When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG system

In Figure 3-122, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is

not actually mounted.

Figure 3-122 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

MUX1A

MUX0A

MUX0B

MUX1B

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PIM3

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM2

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM1

PIM0

LPM

I/O

PCM

I/O

PCM

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 436

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-123.

Figure 3-123 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT)

PCM

P-SW

I/O

SW11 SW12

OPE

ACT

PALM

OPT

SYNC

LPB

12345678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 437

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally.

Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state.

PALM Red Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal.

OPT Red Lights when the optical input signals are cut off.

SYNC Red Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock comes off synchronization.

LPB Green Lights when Loop-back is designated.

ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state.

Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 438

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SW11

1OFF ×Fixed

2ON ×Fixed

3ON ×Fixed

4OFF ×Fixed

5OFF ×Not used

6ON PAD function is effective.

OFF ×PAD function is not effective.

7ON Setting of A-law

OFF ×Setting of µ-law

8ON ×OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0)

OFF OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1)

SW12 1-8 OFF ×Not used

P-SW

1ON Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back)

OFF ×Designation of OLLPB cancel

2ON Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back)

OFF ×Designation of ORLPB cancel.

3OFF ×Not used

4ON Make-busy request

OFF ×Make-busy request cancel

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 439

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

6. External Interface

•Cable Connection

Figure 3-124 Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB

PA-SDTB

PA-SDTA

Fiber optic cable

Note1

SDT CABLEB <S>

Note 1: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 440

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system

As shown in Figure 3-125, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/

PIM3 is not actually mounted.

Figure 3-125 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System

( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. )

( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. )

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PH-PC30 (MUX)

PH-SW10 (TSW)

MUX3

MUX2

MUX1

MUX

PA-SDTB (SDTB)

MUX1A

MUX0A

MUX0B

MUX1B

PA-SDTA (SDTA)

PIM3

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM2

(Not actually

mounted)

PIM1

PIM0

MT24 TSW CA-140

LPM

I/O

PCM

I/O

PCM

Note

Note: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 441

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system

(a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable

When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW

CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies depend-

ing on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s).

Table 3-6 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

PIM3 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J

PIM2 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I

PIM1 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

PIM0 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 442

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

(b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot

Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined

by the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below.

Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration.

Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, the

remaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards.

Table 3-7 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot

MODULE

GROUP

Assigned for

SDT

TIME SLOTS

Assigned for

SDT

CABLE CONNECTIONS

REMARKS

FROM

(Connectors on

PA-SDTB)

(Connectors on

BWB of TSWM)

MG01

PIM2 of IMG0 MUX0A MUX002 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG0 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX102

PIM3 of IMG0 MUX0B MUX003

MUX1B MUX103

MG03

PIM2 of IMG1 MUX0A MUX012 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG1 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX112

PIM3 of IMG1 MUX0B MUX013

MUX1B MUX113

MG05

PIM2 of IMG2 MUX0A MUX022 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG2 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX122

PIM3 of IMG2 MUX0B MUX023

MUX1B MUX123

MG07

PIM2 of IMG3 MUX0A MUX032 In this case, PIM2 and PIM3

of IMG3 are not actually

mounted; However, AUNT

data for PIM2/PIM3 is

required.

MUX1A MUX132

PIM3 of IMG3 MUX0B MUX033

MUX1B MUX133

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 443

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Example: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and

PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown

in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship

to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be

mounted in any PIM.

Figure 3-126 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System

PA-SDTB

PIM 3 Time slots assigned

for SDT (MG07).

PIM2 and PIM3 of

IMG3 are not actually

mounted.

34PH MT24 TSW CA-H

(Refer to Table 3-3.)

To MUX133

To MUX033

To MUX132

To MUX032

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy

IMG3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

Dummy

IMG2

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

TSWM

IMG1

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 0

LPM

IMG0

PIM3

BWB of TSWM

MUX0A

MUX1A

MUX0B

MUX1B

Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT.

(Refer to Table 3-8 and Figure 3-133.)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 444

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

Figure 3-127 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

MUX003 MUX002

MUX013 MUX012

MUX023 MUX022

MUX033 MUX032

MUX103 MUX102

MUX113 MUX112

MUX123 MUX122

MUX133 MUX132

MUXxxx Connectors for SDT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 445

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3-

128 shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface.

Figure 3-128 Level Diagram

Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is as shown in the following table.

Note: Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points.

Table 3-8 Level Margin

CONDITION LEVEL MARGIN

Worst case 4.0 dB

Best case 11.0 dB

0.00 2.00 4.00 6.00 8.00 10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 18.00 20.00 (km)

0.00

-5.00

-10.00

-15.00

-20.00

-25.00

-30.00

-35.00

Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm

Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm

: Best Case

: Worst Case

: Maximum Receiver Sensitivity

: Minimum Receiver Sensitivity

Cable Length

1.20 2.40 3.70 4.40 6.20 7.40 8.60 9.90 11.00 12.00 (miles)

Receiver Sensitivity (dBm)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 446

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

•Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-129.

Figure 3-129 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector

POUT B POUT A

21 3 2 1 3 21 31 2

231231 3

Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 447

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTA

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW11

SW12

P-SW

1234 ON

56 7 8

1234 ON

56 7 8

1ON

234

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 448

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable.

This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the

PA-SDTA card.

Figure 3-130 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System

F u s i o n

Node-A

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Link (Data Link)

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

Internal LAN

FCH

Node-B

Internal LAN

FCH

Fusion Link with FCCH

Fusion Link without FCCH

F u s i o n

Node-A

Internal LAN

Node-B

) SDT: SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler

Fiber Optic Cable

For Dual Configuration

Connection Trunk (Speech Path)

SDTA

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 449

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots.

Mounting conditions are shown below.

•Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB).

•This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables.

•For single configuration: SDT CABLEB <S>

•For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA <D>

•This card is connected to the TSW card.

•Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and

TSW.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PIM

Mounting Module

Universal Slots Universal Slots

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 450

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in the figure in Figure 3-131.

Figure 3-131 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT)

PCM

MUX0A

MUX1A

MUX0B

MUX1B

I/O

OPE

2MALA

2MALB

32MALA

32MALB

ACT0

ACT1

SYC0A

SYC1A

SYC0B

SYC1B

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 451

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

4. Lamp Indications

Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Note: A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT2/3.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation.

Red Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation.

2MALA Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal.

2MALB Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal.

32MALA Red Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal.

32MALB Red Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal.

ACT0 Green Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally.

Off Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state.

ACT1 Green Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally.

Off Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state.

SYC0A Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

SYC1A Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

SYC0B Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

SYC1B Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side.

Off Goes off when the synchronization is not established.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 452

Revision 1.0

PA-SDTB

SDH/SONET Digital Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below:

6. External Interface

Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card.

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card Make-busy

DOWN ×Circuit card Make-busy cancel

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 453

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

1. General Function

Equipped with two circuits of Common Channel Handlers (CCHs), the PA-2CCH A circuit card provides

two signaling links for a digital/analog Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system, which can

be selected by key settings on this card. If a digital CCIS system, this card is connected to a Digital Trunk

Interface (DTI) card with a flat cable to exchange common channel signals as illustrated below. To support

an analog CCIS system, this card also has an RS-232c interface for Modem(s).

Figure 3-132 Location of PA-2CCHA (CCH) within the System

CPU System Clock

INT SW INT

2-wire

PLO

Clock Extraction

(For a PLO-SECONDARY switch)

CCH

DTI

Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)

I/O Local Bus

Flat Cable

CPU

INT SW INT

Analog Tie Line

CCH

TLT

Common Channel Signaling Link (x2)

I/O Local Bus

CLK

MODEM

Digital CCIS

Analog CCIS (with MODEM)

CCIS

NETWORK

CCIS

NETWORK

: Common Channel Signaling Link

: Speech Path (PCM Signal)

: Clock Signal

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 454

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. The DTI and CCH

card, however, cannot coexist in the same Highway Block.

The PA-2CCHA (CCH) card can be mounted in the following universal slots shown below. Note that this

card cannot be mounted in slot 04.

Note: When this card is mounted in slot No.4, the LENS data for the first circuit of the CCH card must be assigned

as “000 000”, which is rejected by the ATRK command.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 455

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-133.

Figure 3-133 Face Layout of PA-2CCHA (CCH)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

DOPE0

DOPE1

Red Lights when the common channel signalling link is set up.

Flash Flashes when CCH is started up.

OPE

N-OPE

DOPE0

DOPE1

SW01

SW02

SW14

SW13

SW12

SW11

SW10

TRK

To "CN2" connector

on CCT/DTI

DCH/CCH

To "TRK" connector

on other DCH/CCH

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 456

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB ON Circuit card make busy

OFF ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01 0ON No. 0 Circuit make busy request

OFF ×No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel

1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy request

OFF ×No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel

2OFF ×Not used

3OFF ×Not used

SW02 0ON Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

OFF ×Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

1ON Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

OFF ×Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

2ON Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

OFF Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

3ON Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

OFF Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

SW10

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.0 CIRCUIT

SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED

ON ON ON 64 kbps

OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)

ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)

OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)

ON ON OFF 64 kbps

OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)

ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)

OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 457

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

Note: When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, SW10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON.

When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10

4ON Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit

OFF Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit

8ON Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit.

OFF Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.

SW11

(MODE0) 0×Standard setting

SW12

(MODE1) 0×Standard setting

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/INSERT IN NO.1 CIRCUIT

SW10-5 SW10-6 SW10-7 TRANSFER SPEED

ON ON ON 64 kbps

OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)

ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)

OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)

ON ON OFF 64 kbps

OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)

ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)

OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 458

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW13

(for No. 0

Circuit)

SW14

(for No. 1

Circuit)

6ON Mode setting; No. 7 PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)

OFF Mode setting; No. 7 CCIS

SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT

SW13-1/

SW14-1 SW13-2/

SW14-2 SW13-3/

SW14-3 SW13-4/

SW14-4 SW13-5/

SW14-5 TIME SLOT NO.

OFF

CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

CH8

CH9

CH10

CH11

CH12

CH13

CH14

CH15

CH16

CH17

CH18

CH19

CH20

CH21

CH22

CH23

CH24

CH25

CH26

CH27

CH28

CH29

CH30

CH31

SETTING OF SPEED OF MODE

SW13-7/

SW14-7 SW13-8/

SW14-8 SPEED

OFF OFF 2400 bps

OFF ON 4800 bps

ON OFF 9600 bps

ON ON Inhibit

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 459

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

6. External Interface

In analog CCIS, necessary leads for Modems appear on LT connectors as follows.

See also Connecting Route Diagram for Digital/Analog CCIS.

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

Accommodated in 2

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

50 24

SG 0

RT 0

RS 0

RD 0

ER 0

ST2 0

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

50 24

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

SD 0

RD 1

ER 1

ST2 1

SD 1

SCKA 0

TDA 0

RDA 0

SCKA 1

TDA 1

RDA 1

SG 1

RT 1

RS 1

SCKB 0

TDB 0

RDB 0

SCKB 1

TDB 1

RDB 1

SG 0

RT 0

RS 0

SG 1

RT 1

RS 1

RD 0

ER 0

ST2 0

SD 0

RD 1

ER 1

ST2 1

SD 1

SCKA 0

TDA 0

RDA 0

SCKA 1

TDA 1

RDA 1

SCKB 0

TDB 0

RDB 0

SCKB 1

TDB 1

RDB 1

2 21 21 21 21 211

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 460

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

Figure 3-134 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

SG 0

RT 0

RS 0

RD 0

ER 0

ST2 0

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

SD 0

RD 1

ER 1

ST2 1

SD 1

SCKA 0

TDA 0

RDA 0

SCKA 1

TDA 1

RDA 1

SG 1

RT 1

RS 1

SCKB 0

TDB 0

RDB 0

SCKB 1

TDB 1

RDB 1

3 3 3 3 3 3

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 461

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

Figure 3-135 Connecting Route Diagram (Digital CCIS)

DTI TA

PBX

MDF

RA RA

RB RB

POUTA

POUTB To PLO

TRK DCH/

CCH

TRK DCH/

CCH

TRK DCH/

CCH

TRK DCH/

CCH

CN2

CCH Note

DTI

Note: A maximum of 7CCH cards

can be connected to a DTI card.

CCH Multiple Connection

CCH

PCM

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

TRK DCH/

CCH

CN2

DTICCH

FRONT VIEW

OUT

• Digital CCIS

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 462

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

Figure 3-136 Connecting Route Diagram (Analog CCIS)

PBX

MDF

ER ER

RT RT

ST2

MODEM

ST2

SD SD

15-m (50-foot) cable limit

• synchronous

• 2400, 4800, 9600 bps

• 4-wire

• Full Duplex

CCH

• Analog CCIS (with MODEM)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 463

Revision 1.0

PA-2CCHA

Common Channel Handler

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW01 SW01-2 and 3: Not used

SW02

SW10

SW11 Standard Setting

SW12 Standard Setting

SW13

SW14

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

12345678

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 464

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at

1.5 M bit/s. Being equipped with a Common Channel Handler (CCH), which can be allocated to a desired

channel among the existing 24 channels by key setting and programming, this card can be used as an inter-

face for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling (CCIS) system. A built-in resonance circuit can be used

for the purpose of extracting clock signals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain

appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been

already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key setting and programming.

Figure 3-137 Location of PA-24CCTA (24CCT) within the System

I/O Local Bus

CPU

System Clock

INT TSW INT

Common Channel Signaling Link

PLO

1.544 MHz Clock Extraction

(For PLO-secondary switch)

CCH

Built-in Common Channel Handler (x1)

24CCT

: Common Channel Signaling Link

: Speech Path (PCM Signal)

: Clock Signal

CCIS

NETWORK

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 465

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-24CCTA (24CCT) card can be mounted in the following universal slots as shown below.

This card is mounted in the following shaded slots.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots Universal Slots

Note: This card cannot be mounted in Slot 05.

Note

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 466

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-138. Note that

there are two types of PA-24 CCTA cards which differ in their face layouts.

Figure 3-138 Face Layout of PA-24CCTA (24CCT)

SW6G

SW5DSW4D

SW6C

SW39

SW58

SW25

SW11B

SW138

SW13B

MODE

OPE

N-OPE

PCM

BER

AIS

DOPE

FRM

RMT

LYR

BL23

BL00

CN2

To "TRK" Connector

on CCH/DCH

SW18

SW19

SW15 SW14

SW13

OPE

N-OPE

PCM

BER

AIS

DOPE

FRM

RMT

LYR

BL23

BL00

CN2

To "TRK" Connector

on CCH/DCH

SW17 SW00

SW01

SW02

SW12

SW11

SW10

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 467

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in Table 3-9.

Table 3-9 PA-24CCTA (24CCT) Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM Red Lights when an input signal is down (PCM LOSS).

FRM Red Lights when a frame alignment loss is detected.

BER Red Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multi frame and when a CRC error

occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.

RMT Red Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.

AIS Yellow Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).

D-OPE Green Remains lit while Common Channel Handler (CCH) block is active.

LYR Green Remains lit while CCIS signal link is set up.

LB Green Remains lit while the CCIS signal is being looped back.

BL00

BL23

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses) or

corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM)

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 468

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Figure 3-139 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00/MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01/13B

OFF ×

OFF ×Note: For more information on loopback, see below.

SW01/SW13B Internal

Loopback

CCH

Control

MBR

CCH

Loopback

ON ON —— ×

OFF ON —×—

ON OFF ×——

OFF OFF ———

SW01/SW13B External

Loopback Payload

Loopback All Circuit

MBR

ON ON —— ×

OFF ON —×—

ON OFF ×——

OFF OFF ———

Switch

TSW Interface

PAD

Speech Path

Control Block

Framer

Line Interface

NETWORK

External Loopback

(Line Loopback)

Payload Loopback

Internal Loopback

PA-24CCTA

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 469

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW02/

MODE

Transmission Guard Timer Setting (sec.)

0×4 (sec.)

15 (sec.)

26 (sec.)

37 (sec.)

48 (sec.)

59 (sec.)

6 10 (sec.)

7 11 (sec.)

8 12 (sec.)

9 13 (sec.)

A 14 (sec.)

B 15 (sec.)

C 16 (sec.)

D 17 (sec.)

E 18 (sec.)

F 19 (sec.)

SW10/4D 1ON Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Negative

OFF ×Logic of Signal Channel A (Receive): Positive

2ON Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Negative

OFF ×Logic of Signal Channel A (Send): Positive

3ON RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out

OFF RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out

4ON Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled

OFF Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled

5ON Data Link Control: MOS

OFF Data Link Control: BOS

6ON Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe

OFF Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe

7ON Coding Type: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

OFF Coding Type: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)

8ON Fixed to ON. When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing

is selected for North America specification.

OFF

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 470

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

SW11/39

ON PAD Control

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

ON ×Data PAD Control

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON ×T Signal Control

OFF

OFF ×

ON ×R Signal Control

OFF

OFF ×

SW12/58

1ON Equalizer Setting

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11/39-1 SW11/39-2 PAD Control

ON ON Bothway

OFF ON Receive only (Send 0dB)

ON OFF Send only (Receive 0dB)

OFF OFF Fixed to ARTD command

SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value

ON ON 64 Kbps

OFF ON 56 Kbps

ON OFF 48 Kbps

OFF OFF 64 Kbps INV

SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control

ON ON ABCD

OFF ON ABAB

ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited

OFF OFF AAAA

SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 T Signal Control

ON ON ABCD

OFF ON ABAB

ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited

OFF OFF AAAA

SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance (feet)

ON ON ON 0 ~ 40 m

ON ON OFF 40 ~ 80 m

ON OFF ON 80 ~ 120 m

ON OFF OFF 120 ~ 160 m

OFF ON ON 160 ~ 200 m

Other Combinations Impossible

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 471

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW12/58

ON PAD Pattern Selection

Note: When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting Table.

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON ×Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.

OFF

ON ×

OFF

SW13/6C 1 ON

—Fixed to all ON (Not used)

2ON

3ON

4ON

5ON

6ON

7ON

8ON ×Netfusing : Not used

OFF Netfusing : Used

SW14/5D

ON Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM

Spec.)

OFF ×Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK

ROM Spec.)

2ON ×LAYER2 Signal Logic: Positive

OFF LAYER2 Signal Logic: Negative

ON In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is:

Not to be notified

OFF ×In the event of a line fault, the upper CPU is:

To be notified

4ON Zero Suppress: Not to be suppressed

OFF Zero Suppress: To be suppressed

SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern

OFF ON ON PAD Pattern 1

OFF ON OFF PAD Pattern 2

ON OFF ON A→µ Loss (Bothway)

ON OFF OFF A→µ Loss (Receive)

OFF OFF ON µ→A Loss (Bothway)

OFF OFF OFF µ→A Loss (Receive)

Other Combinations Impossible

SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 MODE

ON ON Alarm is not sent out

ON OFF

OFF ON All “1”

OFF OFF RMT Alarm

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 472

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

SW15/25 1ON ×Impedance Setting: 100 Ω

OFF Impedance Setting: 110 Ω

2ON Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Ground

OFF ×Setting of Transmission Transformer Middle Point: Open

3ON Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Ground

OFF ×Setting of Receiving Transformer Middle Point: Open

4ON Idle Code Sending: To be sent out

OFF ×Idle Code Sending: Not to be sent out

SW17/6G

1ON Common Channel Signal Transfer Speed Selection

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

ON Signal Channel Designation

OFF

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW17/6G-1 SW17/6G-2 SW17/6G-3 PAD Pattern

ON ON ON 64 Kbps

OFF ON ON 32 Kbps (Forward)

ON OFF ON 16 Kbps (Forward)

OFF OFF ON 8 Kbps (Forward)

ON ON OFF 64 Kbps

OFF ON OFF 32 Kbps (Backward)

ON OFF OFF 16 Kbps (Backward)

OFF OFF OFF 8 Kbps (Backward)

Signal

Channel

SW17/6G

45678

0 OFF OFF OFF ON OFF

1 ON OFF OFF ON OFF

2 OFF ON OFF ON OFF

3 ON ON OFF ON OFF

4 OFF OFF ON ON OFF

5 ON OFF ON ON OFF

6 OFF ON ON ON OFF

7 ONONONONOFF

8 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

9 ON OFF OFF OFF ON

10 OFF ON OFF OFF ON

11 ON ON OFF OFF ON

12 OFF OFF ON OFF ON

13 ON OFF ON OFF ON

14 OFF ON ON OFF ON

15 ON ON ON OFF ON

16 OFF OFF OFF ON ON

17 ON OFF OFF ON ON

18 OFF ON OFF ON ON

19 ON ON OFF ON ON

20 OFF OFF ON ON ON

21 ON OFF ON ON ON

22 OFFONONONON

23 ON ON ON ON ON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 473

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW18/11B 1 ON

Fixed to all ON

2ON

3ON

4ON

ON Selection of CCH: Built-in CCH

OFF Selection of CCH: External CCH

(To be used together with PA-2CCHA card)

6ON Selection of Common Channel Signal Speed

OFF

7ON

OFF

8ON

OFF

SW19/138 1ON COP Alarm: Inhibited

OFF COP Alarm: Allowed

ON Operating Mode Setting

OFF

4ON —Fixed to ON

SW18/11B Transfer Speed

678

OFF ON ON 56Kbps

ON OFF ON As per SW17/6G-1 - 3

ON ON OFF 48Kbps

Other Combinations Impossible

SW19/138 Operating Mode

OFF OFF When No.7 CCIS is set

ON OFF When No.7 CCIS PCR is set

Other

Combinations Not used

Note: PCR (Preventive Cyclic Retransmission method)

Note

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 474

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24CCTA

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD

patterns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done

by key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD

command - PAD. The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.

Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.

Table 3-10 Digital PAD Setting Table

PAD DATA

ARTD

PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A→µ Loss

(Bothway) A→µ Loss

(Receive) µ→A Loss

(Bothway) µ→A Loss

(Receive)

SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE SEND RECIEVE

1 2 [dB] 2 [dB] -3 [dB]

Note 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]

2 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]

3 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]

4 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]

5 Key settings of SW11/39-3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD Patterns)

7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 475

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

6. External Interface

Figure 3-140 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-141).

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in

LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector

50 24

LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

POUTA

POUTB

Accommodated in

2 Accommodated in

POUTA

POUTB

POUTA

123213 123213

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 476

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

Figure 3-141 Connecting Route Diagram

POUTA

POUTB

DIU1A

DIU1B

PLO

PBX MDF

1.5 MHz Clock Extraction Note 1

Installation Cable

24CCT CCIS

NETWORK

Note 2

OUT

Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side.

Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these

leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24CCTA (24CCT) circuit card is as follows.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 477

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM SW00/MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01/13B

SW02

(MODE) Standard Setting

SW10/4D

24-multiframe CCT Standard

12-multiframe CCT Standard

SW11/39

SW12/58

SW13/6C • Fixed to all ON.

ON 2345678

ON 2 3 456 7 8

ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 2345678

ON 23456 7 8

ON 2345678

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 478

Revision 1.0

PA-24CCTA

Common Channel Trunk

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW14/5D

• 24-multiframe CCT Standard

• 12-multiframe CCT Standard

SW15/25

SW17/6G

SW18/11B

SW19/138

ON 2 3 4

1234

ON 2 3 4

1 2 3 4

ON 23456 7 8

ON 2345678

ON 2 3 4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 479

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

1. General Function

This circuit card controls D channels of ISDN Line. This circuit card provides 2-circuit D-channel Handler

(DCH).

Figure 3-142 Location of PA-2DCHA (2DCH) within the System

ILC

TSW

DLC

24DTI

DCH

PLO

DSU

ISDN

Terminal

Dterm

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 480

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below.

•This circuit card must be mounted in a slot on the left side of the slot in which DTI card is mounted.

•This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 04 of PIM0.

Mounting Module PIM

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 481

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-143.

Figure 3-143 Face Layout of PA-2DCHA (2DCH)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

DOPE0

DOPE1

Green Lights when the common channel signaling link is set up.

Flash Flashes when DCH is started up.

OPE

N-OPE

DOPE0

DOPE1

SW14

SW13

SW12

SW10 SW11 SW01

SW02

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 482

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME

SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01

0ON No. 0 Circuit make busy request

OFF ×No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel

1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy request

OFF ×No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel

2OFF×Not used

3OFF×Not used

SW02

0ON Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

OFF ×Loop back of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

1ON Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

OFF ×Loop back of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

2ON Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is performed.

OFF Drop/Insert of No. 0 Circuit is not performed.

3ON Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is performed.

OFF Drop/Insert of No. 1 Circuit is not performed.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 483

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

Note: When SW10-4 is set ON, SW10-1, 10-2 and 10-3 should be set ON.

When SW10-8 is set ON, SW10-5, 10-6 and 10-7 should be set ON.

SW10

4ON Modem is used in No. 0 Circuit

OFF Modem is not used in No. 0 Circuit.

8ON Modem is used in No. 1 Circuit.

OFF Modem is not used in No. 1 Circuit.

SW11

(MODE0)

1AT & T Bell

5 AT & T Communication

SW12

(MODE1)

1AT & T Bell

5 AT & T Communication

SWITCH

NAME

SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/

INSERT IN NO. 0 CIRCUIT

SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 TRANSFER SPEED

ON ON ON 64 kbps

OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)

ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)

OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)

ON ON OFF 64 kbps

OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)

ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)

OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)

SETTING OF TRANSFER SPEED OF DROP/

INSERT IN NO. 1 CIRCUIT

SW10-5 SW10-6 SW10-7 TRANSFER SPEED

ON ON ON 64 kbps

OFF ON ON 32 kbps (Forward)

ON OFF ON 16 kbps (Forward)

OFF OFF ON 8 kbps (Forward)

ON ON OFF 64 kbps

OFF ON OFF 32 kbps (Backward)

ON OFF OFF 16 kbps (Backward)

OFF OFF OFF 8 kbps (Backward)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 484

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW13

(for No. 0

Circuit)

SW14

(for No. 1

Circuit)

6ON D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side

OFF D Channel Mode Selection; User Side

SETTING OF TIME SLOT NUMBER OF DROP/INSERT

SW13-1/

SW14-1 SW13-2/

SW14-2 SW13-3

SW14-3 SW13-4/

SW14-4 SW13-5/

SW14-5 TIME SLOT NO.

OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF CH0

ON OFF OFF OFF OFF CH1

OFF ON OFF OFF OFF CH2

ON ON OFF OFF OFF CH3

OFF OFF ON OFF OFF CH4

ON OFF ON OFF OFF CH5

OFF ON ON OFF OFF CH6

ON ON ON OFF OFF CH7

OFF OFF OFF ON OFF CH8

ON OFF OFF ON OFF CH9

OFF ON OFF ON OFF CH10

ON ON OFF ON OFF CH11

OFF OFF ON ON OFF CH12

ON OFF ON ON OFF CH13

OFFONONONOFF CH14

ON ON ON ON OFF CH15

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON CH16

ON OFF OFF OFF ON CH17

OFF ON OFF OFF ON CH18

ON ON OFF OFF ON CH19

OFF OFF ON OFF ON CH20

ON OFF ON OFF ON CH21

OFF ON ON OFF ON CH22

ON ON ON OFF ON CH23

OFF OFF OFF ON ON CH24

ON OFF OFF ON ON CH25

OFF ON OFF ON ON CH26

ON ON OFF ON ON CH27

OFF OFF ON ON ON CH28

ON OFF ON ON ON CH29

OFFONONONON CH30

ON ON ON ON ON CH31

SETTING OF SPEED MODE

SW13-7/SW14-7 SW13-8/SW14-8 SPEED

OFF OFF 2400 bps

OFF ON 4800 bps

ON OFF 9600 bps

ON ON Inhibit

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 485

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in

Figure 3-144.

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

SG 0 ER 0

RD 0

RT 0 ST2 0

RS 0 SD 0

RD 1

SG 1 ER 1

RT 1 ST2 1

RS 1 SD 1

SG 0 ER 0

RD 0

RT 0 ST2 0

RS 0 SD 0

RD 1

SG 1 ER 1

RT 1 ST2 1

RS 1 SD 1

SCKB 0 SCKA 0

TDB 0 TDA 0

RDB 0 RDA 0

SCKB 1 SCKA 1

TDB 1 TDA 1

RDB 1 RDA 1

SCKB 0 SCKA 0

TDB 0 TDA 0

RDB 0 RDA 0

SCKB 1 SCKA 1

TDB 1 TDA 1

RDB 1 RDA 1

21 2 1 21 12

2121

PWR

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 486

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

Figure 3-144 LT Connector Leads Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

SG 0 ER 0

RD 0

RT 0 ST2 0

RS 0 SD 0

RD 1

SG 1 ER 1

RT 1 ST2 1

RS 1 SD 1

SCLB 0 SCKA 0

TDB 0 TDA 0

RDB 0 RDA 0

SCLB 1 SCKA 1

TDB 1 TDA 1

RDB 1 RDA 1

3 3 3 3 3 3

PWR

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 487

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (1/2)

NEAX2400 IPX MDF

DSU

DCH

DTI

Front Cable connection

DCH DTI/CCT

TRK CN2

Front

• When modem is not used

Note: For cross connections between DTI and D-channel common channel signalling line, refer to the expla-

nations of 24DTI circuit card.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 488

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

Figure 3-145 Connecting Route Diagram (2/2)

NEAX2400 IPX MDF

MODEM

DCH

• When modem is used

ST2

•Cable length is maximum 15 meters (50 feet).

• The modem to be used is a synchronous modem of 2400, 4800, or 9600 bps, and the communication

method is limited to 4-wire full duplex communications.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 489

Revision 1.0

PA-2DCHA

D-Channel Handler

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW01 SW01-2, 3 : Not used

SW02

SW10

SW11 1 : AT & T Bell

5 : AT & T Communication

SW12 1 : AT & T Bell

5 : AT & T Communication

SW13

SW14

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

ON 12345678

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 490

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

1. General Function

This circuit card, which is for ISDN, is used in conjunction with PA-24DTR/PA-24PRTB-A to provide

H11 terminal (1.536 Mbps) with D-channel signal. ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminal (64 Kbps),

incidentally, cannot be connected to this circuit card.

Figure 3-146 Location of PA-ILCG (ILC) Card within the System

PA-24DTR/

PA-24PRTB-A

H11

Terminal/

Terminal

Adapter

ILC

TSW

PRT

ISDN

NETWORK

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 491

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-ILCG (ILC) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots.

Mounting conditions for this circuit card are as follows:

1. This circuit card cannot be mounted in the slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 20, 21, 22, 23.

2. Mount this circuit card so that its leads and the leads of any other analog line/trunk circuit card may

not come out to the same LT cable.

3. This circuit card is not used in even-number module group (MG), unit (U)=0 and group (G)=0.

4. When registering this circuit card in the shaded slots, user must assign B-channels to odd-number

group (G) and D-channel to even-number group(G).

5. Do not mount other line/trunk card in just right side of the slot where a PA-ILCG card is mounted.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

B-ch

D-ch

B-ch D-ch

B-ch

D-ch

Mounting Condition

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 492

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps and Switches

The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 3-147.

Figure 3-147 Face Layout of PA-ILCG (ILC)

OPE

N-OPE

MB KEY

MODE 0

MODE 1

SW06

12345678

PKT

PWR4

LYR4

BL41

BL42

SW05

12345678

SW04

12345678

SW01

1234

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 493

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below:

Table 3-11 PA-ILCG Lamp Indications Reference

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL42

Green Lights green when B2-channel is being accessed and in operation.

Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state.

OFF The corresponding channel is idle.

BL41

Green Lights green when B1-channel is being accessed and in operation.

Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in a make-busy state.

OFF The corresponding channel is idle.

LYR4

Green Remains lit while Layer 2 of the corresponding channel is active.

Flash (120IPM) Flashes while Layer 1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is established.

OFF Layer 1 and/or Layer 2 have not been established.

PWR4 Red Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding circuit is activat-

ed; the corresponding line is short-circuited.

PKT Green Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation.

OFF Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 494

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make-busy

DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel

SW01

1ON ×Fixed to ON

2ON ×Fixed to ON

3ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

4ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

SW04

1ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

2ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

3ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

4ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

5ON ×Fixed to ON (Wiring Mode)

6ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

7ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

8ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

SW05

OFF ×

OFF

5OFF ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

6OFF ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

7ON D-channel Packet Service: Available

OFF D-channel Packet Service: Not available

8ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

SW05-1 SW05-2 Receiving Pad Sending Pad

OFF OFF 0 dB 0 dB

OFF ON 0 dB 2 dB

ON OFF 0 dB 5 dB

ON ON 0 dB 8 dB

PAD Value Selection

SW05-3 SW05-4 Length of Call Reference Value

OFF OFF Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate

OFF ON Basic Rate Interface 1, Primary Rate

ON OFF Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate

ON ON Basic Rate Interface 2, Primary Rate

Length of Call Reference Value Selection

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 495

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Note: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) used in this table have no relation to the actual wiring configuration.

SW06

1ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

2ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

3ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

4ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

5ON ×Data link mode for Layer 2: Point-to-Point (P-P)

(Fixed to ON) Note

6ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

7ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

8ON ×Not used (Fixed to ON)

MODE 0 0×Fixed to 0

1~F Not used

MODE 1

0~5 Not used

6×Fixed to 6

7~F Not used

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 496

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-148.

Figure 3-148 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-149).

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 3, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in

LT 0, 2, 6 Connector

50 24

LT 1, 7 Connector

Accommodated in

2 Accommodated in

TB RA

132 1 23

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 497

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Figure 3-149 Connecting Route Diagram

24DTR/

24PRTB-A

PBX MDF

ILC

Modular

Rosette

Modular

Rosette

ISDN

Terminal

H11 Terminal/

Terminal Adapter

MJ-8SR

MJ-8S

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 498

Revision 1.0

PA-ILCG

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW01

SW04

SW05

SW06

MODE 0

MODE 1

1 2 3 4

ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 2 3 456 7 8

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 499

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-4ILCH is a line circuit card which accommodates ISDN Terminal via NT1. The main features of

this circuit card are shown below:

•A maximum of four Basic Rate Interface (BRI) terminals can be accommodated.

•This card and NT1 are connected using 2-wire U Interface.

•Sealing current (Maximum 15mA) can be supplied for keeping cables from rusting.

Figure 3-150 Location of PA-4ILCH (4ILC) within the System

TSW

I.430

PLO

NT1

ANSI T1.601

PA-4ILCH

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 500

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-4ILCH (4ILC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 501

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-151.

Figure 3-151 Face Layout of PA-4ILCH (4ILC)

BER3

LYR3

BL32

BL31

BER2

LYR2

BL21

BL22

BER1

BL12

LYR1

BL11

BER0

BL02

LYR0

BL01

OPE

MODE

NOPE

MBR

LPB

MONITOR (Not used)

SW21

SW12

SW11

SW20

SW10

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 502

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indication on this circuit card are shown below.

Note: Establishment of synchronization on U Reference Point may require 30 seconds or more.

LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING

OPE Green Lights when the card is in normal operation.

NOPE Red Lights when the card is in make-busy state.

BLn2

n=0~3

Green Lights when B2 channel of line #n is communicating.

Flashing Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM).

Off During idle state.

BLn1

n=0~3

Green Lights when B1 channel of the line #n is communicating.

Flashing Flashes during make-busy state (60 IPM).

Off During idle state.

LYRn

n=0~3

Green Lights when layer 2 link of the line #n is established.

Flashing

Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of S Reference Point (60

IPM). Note

Flashes when synchronization is established on Layer 1 of U Reference Point (120

IPM). Note

Off Synchronization is not established on either Layer 1 or Layer 2.

BERn

n=0~3

Red Two or more CRC errors occur per second and the condition lasts for 10 seconds.

Off One or no CRC error occurs per second.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 503

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Switches on this card have the following meanings.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

MBR

0ON Line 0 make busy request

OFF ×Line 0 make busy request cancel

1ON Line 1 make busy request

OFF ×Line 1 make busy request cancel

2ON Line 2 make busy request

OFF ×Line 2 make busy request cancel

3ON Line 3 make busy request

OFF ×Line 3 make busy request cancel

LPB

0ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 0.

OFF ×Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 0.

1ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 1.

OFF ×Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 1.

2ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 2.

OFF ×Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 2.

3ON Loop back is set on NT1 for line 3.

OFF ×Loop back is canceled on NT1 for line 3.

MODE

0-2 Not used

3×Fixed

4-F Not used

SW10

1ON ×Fixed

2ON ×D-channel Packet Service Available

OFF D-channel Packet Service Not Available

3ON ×Fixed

4ON ×Fixed

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 504

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

Note: PAD control is shown below.

SW11

1ON ×Fixed

2ON ×Fixed

3ON ×Fixed

4ON ×Fixed

5ON ×Fixed

6ON ×Fixed

7ON ×Fixed

8ON Sealing Current is not supplied.

OFF ×Sealing Current is supplied.

SW12

1 ~ 3

4ON ×Fixed

5ON ×Fixed

6ON ×Fixed

7ON ×Fixed

8ON ×Fixed

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

PAD Control (TSW Side PAD Value) Note

SW1 SW2 SW3 TSW Side PAD Value

OFF OFF OFF Not used

ON OFF OFF PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-5dB

OFF ON OFF PAD2=0dB, PAD1=-3dB

ON ON OFF PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB

OFF OFF ON Not used

ON OFF ON PAD2=0dB, PAD1=5dB

(Standard Setting)

OFF ON ON PAD2=0dB, PAD1=3dB

ON ON ON PAD2=0dB, PAD1=0dB

PAD1

PAD2

Line Side

TSW Side

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 505

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

Note 1: The terms Point-to-Point (P-P) and Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP) used in this table have no relation to the

actual wiring configuration.

Note 2: This switch must be set according to the specification of the ISDN terminal.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW20

Note 1

Note 2

ON Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0:

Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 0:

Point-to-Point (P-P)

ON Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1:

Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 1:

Point-to-Point (P-P)

ON Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2:

Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 2

Point-to-Point (P-P)

ON Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3:

Point-to-Multipoint (P-mP)

OFF Data link mode for Layer 2 of line 3:

Point-to-Point (P-P)

SW21

Note 2

ON On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF On line 0, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

ON On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF On line 1, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

ON On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF On line 2, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

ON On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is activated on a call basis.

OFF On line 3, Layer 1 of S Reference Point is always activated.

5ON ×Fixed

6ON ×Fixed

7ON ×Fixed

8ON ×Fixed

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 506

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Accommodation of the LT connector leads of this circuit card and connecting route diagram are shown in

Figure 3-152.

Figure 3-152 LT Connector Leads Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

PWR

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

B0 A0

B1 A1

B2 A2

B3 A3

21 3 2 1 3 21 31 2

231231 3

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 507

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

Figure 3-153 Connecting Route Diagram

MDF

PIM

NT1

ILC A

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 508

Revision 1.0

PA-4ILCH

ISDN Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

MB UP: Circuit card make busy

DOWN: Circuit card make busy cancel

MBR

LPB

MODE

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW20

SW21

OFF

No. 3

No. 2

No. 1

No. 0

OFF

No. 3

No. 2

No. 1

No. 0

12 3 4

12345678

1234

12345678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 509

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

1. General Function

The PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) circuit card provides an interface between the system and a maximum of eight

ISDN BRI (Basic Rate Interface) terminals, allowing the system to use eight ISDN BRIs, which are made

up of two B channels at 64 kbps and one D channel at 16 kbps (2B+D × 8), on the same bus. In addition,

this card supports D channel packet function. For this feature, however, available channels are seven

channels, ranging from No. 0 to No. 6.

Figure 3-154 Location of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC) within the System

PRT

ILC

(MAX. 8 terminals)

(MAX. 8 circuits) ISDN

NETWORK

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 510

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-8ILCE-A card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Note: The circuit card cannot be mounted in slot No. 04 of PIM0. This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0

(U=0) of even-number Module Group.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Note

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 511

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on the circuit card is shown in Figure 3-155.

Figure 3-155 Face Layout of PA-8ILCE-A (ILC)

OPE

SW02 SW03 SW06

SW04 SW05

N-OPE

BL02

BL01

LYR0

PWR0

CH #7

CH #6

CH #5

CH #4

CH #3

CH #2

CH #1

CH #0

SW00 SW01

MODE1

MODE0

PKT

BL72

LYR7

BL62

LYR6

BL52

LYR5

BL42

LYR4

BL32

LYR3

BL22

LYR2

BL12

LYR1

BL02

LYR0

BL71

PWR7

BL61

PWR6

BL51

PWR5

BL41

PWR4

BL31

PWR3

BL21

PWR2

BL11

PWR1

BL01

PWR0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 512

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on the circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: Depending on the type of the connected ISDN terminal, whose Layer2 is not always active, this lamp may

flash when the terminal is idle and lights green at the time of call set-up.

LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE Green Remains lit while the circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while the circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL n1

(n=0-7)

Green Lights green when B1 channel is being accessed and in operation.

Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in make-busy state.

OFF The corresponding channel is idle.

BL n2

(n=0-7)

Green Lights green when B2 channel is being accessed and in operation.

Flash (60IPM) The corresponding channel is in make-busy state.

OFF The corresponding channel is idle.

LYR n

(n=0-7)

Green Remains lit while Layer2 of the corresponding channel is active.

Note

Flash (120IPM) Flashes while Layer1 synchronization of the corresponding channel is

established.

OFF Layer1 and/or Layer2 have not been established.

PWR n

(n=0-7) Red Lights red when overvoltage protection function for the corresponding

circuit is activated; the corresponding line is short-circuited.

PKT Green Lights green when D channel Packet is in operation.

OFF Remains off when D channel Packet is not in operation.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 513

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on the circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB ON Make busy of the circuit card.

OFF ×Normal setting

SW00

1ON ×

Fixed to all ON.

2ON ×

3ON ×

4ON ×

SW01

1ON ×

Fixed to all ON.

2ON ×

3ON ×

4ON ×

SW02

1ON ×

Fixed to all ON.

2ON ×

3ON ×

4ON ×

SW03

1ON ×

Fixed to all ON.

2ON ×

3ON ×

4ON ×

SW04

Note

1ON Circuit #0: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #0: Short Passive Connection

2ON Circuit #1: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #1: Short Passive Connection

3ON Circuit #2: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #2: Short Passive Connection

4ON Circuit #3: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #3: Short Passive Connection

5ON Circuit #4: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #4: Short Passive Connection

6ON Circuit #5: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #5: Short Passive Connection

7ON Circuit #6: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #6: Short Passive Connection

8ON Circuit #7: Wiring other than Short Passive Connection

OFF Circuit #7: Short Passive Connection

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 514

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

OFF

•Short Passive Bus mode: This mode is also a point-to-multipoint mode, in which a maximum of eight terminals can be

connected anywhere on the bus. Note that the bus length is limited to 200 m in this case.

•Extended Passive Bus mode: This mode is a point-to-multipoint mode, in which up to eight terminals can be connected.

Note that the terminals must be connected within 50 m from the end of the bus cables as shown below.

max 600 m

Modular Rossete

ILC TE

max 400m

Modular Rossete

TE TE

max 50m

max 200 m

Modular Rossete

ILC

Modular Rossete

Terminals can be connected any location on the bus.

Note: Set the SW04 to determine the 4-wire bus mode referring to the following.

ILC

(in the case of 0.5φ [mm])

(in the case of 0 .5φ [mm])

(in the case of 0.5φ [mm])

(with terminating

resistor (100Ω))

(with terminating

resistor (100Ω))

(with terminating

resistor (100Ω))

•Point-to-Point mode: In this mode one Terminal Equipment (TE) can be connected at the end of up to a maximum of 600

m of cable as shown below.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 515

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Note: Adjust each key according to the specification of each ISDN terminal.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW05

ON PAD Level Adjustment:

OFF ×

3OFF ×Fixed to OFF.

4OFF ×Fixed to OFF.

5OFF ×Not used

6OFF ×Not used

7ON Packet Access via D channel: In Service

OFF Packet Access via D channel: Out of Service

8ON ×Fixed to ON.

SW06

Note

1ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #0): Point-to-Multipoint

2ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #1): Point-to-Multipoint

3ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #2): Point-to-Multipoint

4ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #3): Point-to-Multipoint

5ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #4): Point-to-Multipoint

6ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #5): Point-to-Multipoint

7ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #6): Point-to-Multipoint

8ON Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Point

OFF Bus Mode in Layer2 (circuit #7): Point-to-Multipoint

SW1 SW2 RECEIVE (dB) SEND (dB)

OFF

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 516

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MODE0

0×Fixed to 0.

Not used

MODE1

Not used

6×Fixed to 6.

Not used

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 517

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

6. External Interface

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-157)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

1212 12

12 1212

RB0

TB0

RB1

TB1

RB2

TB2

RB3

TB3

RB4

TB4

RB5

TB5

RB6

TB6

RB7

TB7

RA0

TA0

RA1

TA1

RA2

TA2

RA3

TA3

RA4

TA4

RA5

TA5

RA6

TA6

RA7

TA7

RA0

TA0

RA1

TA1

RA2

TA2

RA3

TA3

RA4

TA4

RA5

TA5

RA6

TA6

RA7

TA7

RB0

TB0

RB1

TB1

RB2

TB2

RB3

TB3

RB4

TB4

RB5

TB5

RB6

TB6

RB7

TB7

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 518

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Figure 3-156 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

333333

RA4

TA4

RA5

TA5

RA6

TA6

RA7

TA7

RB4

TB4

RB5

TB5

RB6

TB6

RB7

TB7

RA0

TA0

RA1

TA1

RA2

TA2

RA3

TA3

RB0

TB0

RB1

TB1

RB2

TB2

RB3

TB3

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 519

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

Figure 3-157 Connecting Route Diagram

MDF

ILC

Modular

Rossete

with terminating

resistor (100Ω)

MDF

ILC

Modular

Rossete

TE TE

Modular

Rossete

with terminating

resistor (100Ω)

• Point-to-Point

• Point-to-Multipoint

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 520

Revision 1.0

PA-8ILCE-A

ISDN Terminal Line Circuit

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT

NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW00

SW01

SW02

SW03

SW04

SW05

SW06

MODE0

MODE1

ON 2 3 4

ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ON 2 3 456 7 8

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 521

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-4DATA (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features

related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,

Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in

one of the following three modes.

•16-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)

•32-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)

•60-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)

A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set (See the Reference). In addition,

this circuit card can be used as an external music source.

Figure 3-158 Location of PA-4DATA (DAT) within the System

COT

GTCPU

ATI INCOMING CALL

INCOMING CALL

PUBLIC

NETWORK

CALLING PARTY

TSW

ATTCON

(Busy)

(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)

We are sorry, the line is

busy now. Please stay on

the line for a while.

DAT

This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 522

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-4DATA (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 523

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-159.

Figure 3-159 Face Layout of PA-4DATA (DAT)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL4

BL7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a

recording source.

Flash Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through

No. 3 circuit).

BL0

BL3

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state

or has not been assigned in the system.

OPE

N-OPE

BL7 (G)

BL4 (G)

(SW11)

(SW9)

BL3 (R)

BL0 (R)

(SW10)

(SW8)

JACK

(SW12)

SW5 SW7

SW6

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4

MBRQ

MRCS

START

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 524

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note 4: Valid in the case of recording or playback from a telephone set.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB (SW11) UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW1 (for No. 0

Circuit)

SW2 (for No. 1

Circuit)

SW3 (for No. 2

Circuit)

SW4 (for No. 3

Circuit)

SW5

Note 4

ON ×Compression Law: µ-law

OFF Compression Law: A-law

4ON When using as an external music-on-hold source

OFF When using as announcement equipment only

Note 1: 16-sec. mode = 4 recording circuits

32-sec. mode = 2 recording circuits

60-sec. mode = 1 recording circuit

Note 2: For each circuit, SW1 - SW4 must be set in

the same way (Two different modes cannot

be mixed assigned.).

SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT

1234TIMER (MODE)

OFF

16-sec. mode

32-sec. mode

60-sec. mode

Note 3: Set the Recording/Playback Timer in the same way as set

by SW1-SW4.

SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

SW5-1 SW5-2 RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

OFF

16-sec. Recording/Playback

32-sec. Recording/Playback

60-sec. Recording/Playback

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 525

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW6

1ON Single playback by No. 0 Circuit Note 5

OFF Multiple playback by No. 0 Circuit

2ON Single playback by No. 1 Circuit Note 5

OFF Multiple playback by No. 1 Circuit

3ON Single playback by No. 2 Circuit Note 5

OFF Multiple playback by No. 2 Circuit

4ON Single playback by No. 3 Circuit Note 5

OFF Multiple playback by No. 3 Circuit

5OFF ×Fixed

6OFF ×Fixed

7OFF ×Not used

8ON Recording from a telephone set

OFF ×Normal setting

Note 5: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback

(ON).

SW7

1OFF ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3OFF ×Not used

4OFF ×Not used

START (SW8) UP Setting for recording start from a tape recorder or for

playback start.

DOWN ×Normal setting

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 526

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

Note 6: When this circuit card is using an external music-on-hold source, set 0, 4 or 6 by timer mode.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MRCS

(SW9) Note 6

ESet to E while the circuit card is using as announcement

equipment only.

0Designation of No. 0 Circuit.

The timer is 16-sec. mode.

1Designation of No. 1 Circuit.

The timer is 16-sec. mode.

2Designation of No. 2 Circuit.

The timer is 16-sec. mode.

3Designation of No. 3 Circuit.

The timer is 16-sec. mode.

4Designation of No. 0 and No. 1 Circuit.

The timer is 32-sec. mode.

5Designation of No. 2 and No. 3 Circuit.

The timer is 32-sec. mode.

6Designation of All Circuits.

The timer is 60-sec. mode.

F Recording from a telephone set.

MBRQ

(SW10)

0ON No. 0 Circuit make busy request

No. 0 Circuit is designated during a recording.

OFF ×No. 0 Circuit make busy request cancel

1ON No. 1 Circuit make busy request

No. 1 Circuit is designated during a recording.

OFF ×No. 1 Circuit make busy request cancel

2ON No. 2 Circuit make busy request

No. 2 Circuit is designated during a recording.

OFF ×No. 2 Circuit make busy request cancel

3ON No. 3 Circuit make busy request

No. 3 Circuit is designated during a recording.

OFF ×No. 3 Circuit make busy request cancel

(SW12)

UP Recording from a tape recorder (WRITE mode)

DOWN ×Normal setting

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 527

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

6. External Interface

When this circuit card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following leads (FM, E) appear from

the LT connector.

Figure 3-160 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

50 24

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

23123123

123123123

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Highway Block

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 528

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

[Reference]

How to Record a Message

•Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.

•Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.

•Turn On the MBRQ key to make busy a channel to be recorded.

(To record a message in the 60 sec. mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)

•Turn the WR key upwards.

(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder is connected to the circuit.)

•Turn the START key upwards.

(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)

Table 3-12 Switch Settings on DAT (Example 60 sec. mode)

SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW1

SW4

Timer Value for Channel 0-3: 60 sec.

SW5

Circuit Card Timer: 60 sec.

A-law/µ-law: µ-law

External Music Source/Announcement

Equipment:

Announcement Equipment

SW6 Single/Repeated Playback:

Repeated Playback

MRCS Channel Designation:

60 sec. mode

OPE

N-OPE

12345678

SW6

1234

SW5

1234

SW7

1234

SW1

1234

SW2

1234

SW3

1234

SW4

BL7

BL0

MBRQ

MRCS

START

JACK

BATTERY

PACK

1234

1 2 3 4

12345678

DAT

Jack

Front

Earphone Jack (3.6 )

Tape Recorder

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 529

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

•Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.

- recording -

•The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 ~ BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)

•Return the START, WR key to the previous position.

How to Play Back the Recorded Message

•Playback from a telephone set

•Set the related switches on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card.

•Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access.”

•Hear the recorded message.

•Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATA (DAT) card

•Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATA (DAT) card.

•Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch.

•Turn the START key upwards.

•Hear the recorded message.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 530

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATA

Digital Announcement Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

SW6

SW7

START

(SW8)

MRCS

(SW9)

MBREQ

(SW10)

(SW12)

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

12 3 4

1234

1 2 3 4

12345678

1234

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 531

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-4DATB (DAT) circuit card is used as a Digital Announcement Trunk supporting service features

related to announcement function such as Automated Attendant, Delay Announcement Attendant,

Announcement Service (for Hotel System). Depending upon the switch setting, this circuit card works in

one of the following three modes.

• 64-sec. mode (maximum 4 CHs/card)

•128-sec. mode (maximum 2 CHs/card)

•240-sec. mode (maximum 1 CH/card)

A message can be recorded from either a tape recorder or a telephone set. (See the Reference).

In addition, this circuit card can be used as an external music source.

Figure 3-161 Location of PA-4DATB (DAT) within the System

COT

GTCPU

ATI INCOMING CALL

INCOMING CALL

PUBLIC

NETWORK

CALLING PARTY

TSW

ATTCON

(Busy)

(PRERECORDED MESSAGE)

We are sorry, the line is

busy now. Please stay on

the line for a while.

DAT

This diagram shows an example when this card is used for Delay Announcement Attendant.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 532

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-4DATB (DAT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 533

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-162.

Figure 3-162 Face Layout of PA-4DATB (DAT)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

BL4

BL7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is connected to a record-

ing source.

Flash Flashes while message recording is in progress on the corresponding circuit (No. 0 through

No. 3 circuit)

BL0

BL3

Red Lights when the corresponding circuit (No 0 through No. 3 circuits) is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit (No. 0 though No. 3 circuits) is in make-busy state

or has not been assigned in the system.

OPE

N-OPE

BL7

BL0

JACK

SW5 SW3

MBRQ

MRCS

START

SW6 SW1

SW7 SW2

SW4

JP0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 534

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

MBRQ

1-4 ON Make busy request on a channel basis

(Channel Designation for Recording/Playback)

OFF ×Make busy request cancel on a channel basis

MRCS 0

SW1

SW4

Each Switch corresponds to each channel

DAT: channel

SW1: channel #0

SW2: channel #1

SW3: channel #2

SW4: channel #3

Setting of Recording Mode

SWITCH NO. Mode Channel

64-sec. mode

4128-sec. mode 0, 1

52, 3

6 240-sec. mode 0, 1, 2, 3

SETTING OF TIMER FOR EACH CIRCUIT

1234TIMER (MODE)

OFF

64-sec. mode

128-sec. mode

240-sec. mode

ON ON ON ON Not available

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 535

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW5

3ON ×Compression Law: µ-law

OFF Compression Law: A-law

4ON To be used as external hold tone source

OFF To be used as announcement equipment

SW6

1ON Single playback of No. 0 channel Note 3

OFF Multiple playback of No. 0 channel Note 2

2ON Single playback of No. 1 channel Note 3

OFF Multiple playback of No. 1 channel Note 2

3ON Single playback of No. 2 channel Note 3

OFF Multiple playback of No. 2 channel Note 2

4ON Single playback of No. 3 channel Note 3

OFF Multiple playback of No.3 channel Note 2

5ON RAM Test data-clear

OFF ×RAM Test data-store

6OFF ×Not used

7OFF ×Not used

8OFF ×Not used

Note 2: When this card is used as announcement equipment, SW6-1~ 6-4 should be set OFF.

Note 3: For Automated Attendant and Delay Announcement-Attendant, set single playback (ON).

Note 1: Setting of Recording/Playback Timer should

correspond to that of SW1-SW4.

SETTING OF ANNOUNCEMENT RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

SW5-1 SW5-2 RECORDING/PLAYBACK TIME

OFF

64-sec. Recording/Playback

128-sec. Recording/Playback

240-sec. Recording/Playback

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 536

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW7 1ON Activation of RAM Test

OFF ×Normal Setting

2ON Port Microprocessor is reset when MBR key is ON.

OFF ×Port Microprocessor is not reset when MBR key is ON.

3OFF ×Not used

4OFF ×Not used

WR UP For Recording from the phone jack

DOWN ×Normal setting

START UP When starting recording from the phone jack or playback.

DOWN ×Normal setting

Table 3-13 Jumper Setting

SWITCH SWITCH

SHAPE SETTING DESCRIPTION

JP0 LEFT Compression Law: µ-law

RIGHT Compression Law: A-law

LEFT RIGHT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 537

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

6. External Interface

When this card is used as an external music-on-hold source, the following cable connection is required.

Figure 3-163 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 2

50 24

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

Accommodated in 3

123123 123123123

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Highway Block

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 538

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

[Reference]

•Prior to your recording, set switches on the DAT card according to the following example.

•Connect a tape recorder to the DAT card with a cable.

•Turn On the key to make busy a channel to be recorded.

(To record a message in the 240 sec mode, all circuits must be placed into MB state.)

•Turn the key upwards.

(The corresponding BL lamp lights green indicating the tape recorder has been connected to the circuit.)

•Turn the key upwards.

(The corresponding BL lamp starts flashing.)

Table 3-14 SWITCH SETTINGS ON DAT (Example <240 sec. mode>)

SWITCH SETTING DESCRIPTION

SW1

SW4

Timer Value for Channel 0-3 240 sec.

SW5

Circuit Card Timer: 240 sec.

A-law/µ-law: µ-law

External Music Source/Announcement

Equipment:

Announcement Equipment

SW6 Single/Repeated Playback:

Repeated Playback

MRCS Channel Designation:

240 sec. mode

JP0 A-law/µ-law: µ-law

HOW TO RECORD A MESSAGE

OPE

N-OPE

12345678

SW6

1234

SW7

1234

SW2

1234

SW1

1234

SW5

1234

SW3

1234

SW4

JP0

BL7

BL0

MBRQ

MRCS

START

JACK

BATTERY

PACK

1234

12345678

LEFT

(DAT)

jack

Front

earphone jack (3.6 )

Tape Recorder

MBRQ

START

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 539

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

•Start the tape recorder and record your message in the designated channel.

- recording -

•The corresponding BL lamp (BL0 - BL7) lights steadily. (Recording ends.)

•Return the START, WR key to the previous position.

Playback from a telephone set

•Set the related switches on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.

•Seize a specific channel by “Individual Trunk Access”.

•Hear the recorded message.

Playback from the phone jack on PA-4DATB (DAT) card

•Connect a earphone to the phone jack on the PA-4DATB (DAT) card.

•Select your desired channel (0-3) by the MRCS switch.

•Turn the START key upwards.

•Hear the recorded message.

HOW TO PLAY BACK THE RECORDED MESSAGE

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 540

Revision 1.0

PA-4DATB

Digital Announcement Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

START

MBRQ

MRCS

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

SW6

SW7

JP0

1 2 3 4

1234

12 3 4

12345678

1234

RIGHTLEFT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 541

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

PH-M16

Line Test

1. General Function

This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports to

send howler tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and

send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test.

Note: A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of line available the line test/automatic

trunk test at the same time is only one.

Figure 3-164 Location of PH-M16 (LTST) card within the System (1-IMG System)

TEL

PIM

LPRA

TEST

EQ LTST GT CPU

TSW

EXTENDED I/O BUS

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 542

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below.

Note: This circuit card is used for 1-IMG System.

00 01 02 03 04

PH-M16

LPM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 543

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-165.

Figure 3-165 Face Layout of PH-M16 (LTST) Card

Note: CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment.

SW0

OPE/MB

CRIN

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 544

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

4. Lamp Indications

The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card.

5. Switch Settings

The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard

setting, it is indicated with “X” in the table below.

LAMP

NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION

OPE/MB Green This circuit card is operating.

Red This circuit card is make-busy.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make-busy.

DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel

SW0

1ON ×Setting of a condition of DT detection

(440Hz+350Hz)

2ON ×Setting of a condition of RBT detection

(440Hz+480Hz)

3ON Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msc.)

OFF ×Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.)

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending

test tone to ODT

(Set soft control or E-wire loop back)

OFF

Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending

test tone to ODT

(Set soft control only)

BASIC INTERVAL TIMER

SW0

5678TIME

ON OFF OFF OFF 8µ

ON ON OFF OFF 16µ

ON ON ON OFF 32µ

ON ON ON ON 64µ

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 545

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

6. External Interface

Figure 3-166 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

50 24

BELL0A

BELL1A

TELA

LCA

THOWA

ONHK

TCR

ATM

ATA

OUTA

TA1

EXMN

MJ0A

MN0A

MJ1A

MN1A

INA

BELL0B

BELL1B

TELB

LCB

THOWB

THOWS

ATB

OUTB

TB1

BELL

EXMJ

MJ0B

MN0B

MJ1B

MN1B

INB

MISC CONNECTOR

00 01 02 03 04

MISC Connector Accommodation

Circuit Card Backboard Connector

Connector Name

Slot Number

LPM

LPM Backboard

Circuit Card Backboard Connector

68PH EXMISC CABLE

MISC

MISC CONNECTOR

(PH-M16)

PH-M16

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 546

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

Figure 3-167 Connecting Route Diagram

OUTA

OUTB

INA

INB

TA1

TB1

LTST

ODT

MDFPBX

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 547

Revision 1.0

PH-M16

Line Test

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW0

ON(MB)

OFF

1234 56 78

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 548

Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

1. General Function

This circuit card is bidirectional amplifier circuitry to be used for such a purpose as level guaranteeing in

a public line—tie line connection. The circuit card is provided with four bidirectional amplifier circuits and

controls gains to speech loss which may vary with the kind of line involved in the connection. Also, this

circuit card is provided with the function to disable the AGC when modem signals such as FAX signals

have arrived.

Figure 3-168 Location of PA-4AMPC (4AMP) within the System

AGC

Fix AMP

C.O. Trunk

ECa

PA-4AMPC

Tie Line N.W Tie Line Trunk

TSW

ECa:

ECb:

AGC:

FixAMP:

Echo Canceller which suppresses echo

in the hybrid circuit of a C.O. trunk.

Echo Canceller which suppresses echo

in the tie-line side.

Automatic Gain Control circuit (amplifies

voice signals arriving from the public

network.)

voice signals arriving from the tie-line

network.)

Public N.W

ECb

PAD

Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies

voice signals arriving from the public

network)

Fixed Gain Amplifier Circuit (amplifies

PAD:

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 549

Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2300

PIM

Mounting Module

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 550

Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-169.

Figure 3-169 Face Layout of PA-4AMPC (4AMP)

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

OPE

BL3

BL0

MB3

MB0

SW11

SW02

SW01

SW00

SW03

SW04

SW10 SW12

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BL0 Green BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state.

BL3 OFF BL-lamp remains off when the corresponding circuit is in idle state.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 551

Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

SWITCH SETTING STANDARD MEANING

NAME NO. SETTING

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

0ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

OFF ×Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.

SW01

1ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

OFF ×Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.

2ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

OFF ×Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.

3ON The corresponding circuit is in make busy state.

OFF ×Make busy of the corresponding circuit is canceled.

1OFF ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3OFF ×Fixed

Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line)

ON side operate. (When this switch has been set to ON,

set SW10, SW11, and SW12 to right side.)

SW02 Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.

OFF ×(When this switch has been set to OFF, set SW10, SW11,

and SW12 to left side.)

5OFF ×Fixed

6OFF ×Fixed

7OFF ×Fixed

8OFF ×Fixed

SW00

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 552

Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH SETTING STANDARD MEANING

NAME NO. SETTING

SW03

SW04 is set to all ON.

SW10 Right (SIG) Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

Left (CAS) ×Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.

SW11 Right (SIG) Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

Left (CAS) ×Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.

SW12 Right (SIG) Both ECa (Public Line) side and ECb (Tie Line) side operate.

Left (CAS) ×Only ECa (Public Line) side operates.

SW03-1 SW03-2

ON ON 0 dB (Standard)

SETTING OF FIXED GAIN OF FIX AMP

OFF ON 4 dB

ON OFF 8 dB

OFF OFF 12 dB

SW03-3 SW03-4

ON ON [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -15dBm0

are adjusted to -15dBm0] (Standard)

SETTING OF GAIN OF BY AGC

0dBr

OFF ON [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -11dBm0

are adjusted to -11dBm0]

+4dBr

ON OFF [Signals ranging from -35dBm0 to -19dBm0

are adjusted to -19dBm0]

-4dBr

SW04

When this card does not work as AGC:

Amplification of

voice from the

public network

Amplification

of voice from the

tie-line network

0 dB 4 dB 8 dB 12 dB

0 dB

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

4 dB

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

8 dB

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

12 dB

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

SW03

SW04

12 34ON

12 34ON 12 34ON

12 34ON

When this card works as AGC:

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 553

Revision 1.0

PA-4AMPC

AMP Pool Trunk

6. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM SW01

SW02

SW00 (MB)

SW03

Circuit card make busy cancel

ON 1234

ON 12345678

SW04

SW11

SW12

DOWN

Make busy switch of the corresponding

circuit (No. 0 ~ No. 3 circuits)

ON : Make busy of each circuit

OFF : Make busy cancel of each circuit

Left Right

SW04 ON 1234

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 554

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-8TLTR(TLT) circuit card provides eight trunks whose interface can be selected among the

following four types by key setting on a 4-channel basis.

•Loop Dialing (LD)

•Direct Inward Dialing (DID)

•2-wire E & M

•4-wire E & M

In addition, programmable PADs, whose value can be adjusted by key setting, are equipped with a 4-wire

E & M interface. Note that a cable, which is connected to the “ODT” connector on the front edge of this

card, is necessary when circuits #4 through #7 are used as 2-wire/4-wire E & M trunks. A typical example

of channel allocation is illustrated in Figure 3-170.

Figure 3-170 Location of PA-8TLTR (TLT) within the System

GTCPU

ODT #0

ODT #3

DID #0

DID #3

I/O Local Bus

Terminal

SWINT INT PA-8TLTR MDF

2W/4W

Carrier

Equipment

circuit #0

circuit #3

circuit #4

circuit #7

PRIVATE

NETWORK

PUBLIC

NETWORK

Note: This diagram shows an example when the PA-8TLTR is used as four 2W/4W E&M and four DID trunks.

In this instance, a flat cable connection is not required.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 555

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

2. Mounting Location / Condition

The PA-8TLTR (TLT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 556

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-171.

Figure 3-171 Face Layout of PA-8TLTR (TLT) Card

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating.

BL0

BL7

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or while DP signals are being

received (flashes to the dial pulses)

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

OPE

BL7

BL0

SW0 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 MB7

MB0

ODT

Note

Note: This connector is used when “E & M” is selected for circuits #4 through #7.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 557

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

(SW00)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

MB0 - 7

(SW01) 0ON Make busy of the No. 0 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 0 circuit

1ON Make busy of the No. 1 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 1 circuit

2ON Make busy of the No. 2 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 2 circuit

3ON Make busy of the No. 3 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 3 circuit

4ON Make busy of the No. 4 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 4 circuit

5ON Make busy of the No. 5 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 5 circuit

6ON Make busy of the No. 6 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 6 circuit

7ON Make busy of the No. 7 circuit

OFF ×Make busy cancel of the No. 7 circuit

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 558

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW0

(SW10)

4OFF ×Not used

5OFF ×Fixed

6ON ×Fixed

7OFF ×Fixed

8OFF ×Not used

SW1

(SW15)

1ON Programmable PAD P0 Value

0.5 dB P0 value is determined as

a sum of selected PAD

values of SW1 (elements

1-5). Note that this setting

is valid for 4W E&M

system.

-Example-

In this case P0 value is

12.5 dB.

OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

2ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 1 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

3ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 2 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

4ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 4 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

5ON Programmable PAD P0 Value 8 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P0 Value 0 dB

6 OFF Fixed

7OFF Not used

8OFF Not used

SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 0-3 CIRCUIT

TRUNK KIND 4-7 CIRCUIT

TRUNK KIND

OFF

LD/DID

EMT

Not used

2W/4W E&M

LD/DID

Not used

2W/4W E&M

SW1-1: ON (0.5 dB)

SW1-2: OFF ( 0 dB)

SW1-3: OFF ( 0 dB)

SW1-4: ON ( 4 dB)

SW1-5: ON ( 8 dB)

PAD VALUE [dB]

SEND RECEIVE

Possible Setting

Range P0: 0 - +15.5

0.5 step P1: 0 - +15.5

0.5 step

P2: 0 - +7.5

0.5 step P3: 0 - +7.5

0.5 step

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 559

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW2

(SW20) 1ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 0.5 dB P1 value is determined as a

sum of selected PAD values

of SW2 (elements 1-5). Note

that this setting is valid for

4W E&M system.

- Example -

In this case P1 value is 12.5

dB.

OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

2ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 1 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

3ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 2 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

4ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 4 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

5ON Programmable PAD P1 Value 8 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P1 Value 0 dB

6OFF ×Fixed

7OFF ×Fixed

8OFF ×Fixed

SW2-1: ON (0.5 dB)

SW2-2: OFF ( 0 dB)

SW2-3: OFF ( 0 dB)

SW2-4: ON ( 4 dB)

SW2-5: ON ( 8 dB)

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 560

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Note: For the setting range of Programmable PAD Values, see the “Setting Range of Programmable PAD

Values” shown for SW1.

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW3

(SW25) 1ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 0.5 dB

P2 Values is total

of PAD Values

Note

(Valid when 4W

E&M system)

(Ex)

SW3-1: OFF

SW3-2: ON

SW3-3: OFF

SW3-4: OFF

in this case P2

value is 1 dB.

P3 Values is total

of PAD Values

Note

(Valid when 4W

E&M system)

(Ex)

SW3-5: OFF

SW3-6: ON

SW3-7: OFF

SW3-8: OFF

in this case P3

value is 1 dB.

OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

2ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 1 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

3ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 2 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

4ON Programmable PAD P2 Value 4 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P2 Value 0 dB

5ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 0.5 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

6ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 1 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

7ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 2 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

8ON Programmable PAD P3 Value 4 dB

OFF Programmable PAD P3 Value 0 dB

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 561

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW4

(SW30

[No.0-3

Circuit]

SW5

(SW40)

[No. 4-7

Circuit]

(When

Trunk Kind

has been set

as LD/DID)

1 ~ 4

Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network

(Valid for LD/DID)

5OFF ×Fixed

6OFF ×Not used

7OFF ×Not used

8OFF ×Not used

SW4/5 Terminating

Impedance Balancing Network

1234

OFF OFF OFF OFF

ON OFF OFF OFF

2.16µ F

600Ω

350Ω

1KΩ

0.21µ F

(EIA/TIA -464A)

600Ω

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 562

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

SWITCH SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW4

(SW30

[No.0-3

Circuit]

SW5

(SW40)

[No. 4-7

Circuit]

(When

Trunk Kind

has been set

as 2W

E&M)

1 ~ 4, 6

Setting of Terminating Impedance and Balancing Network

(Valid for E&M)

5OFF ×Not used

6ON Speech Line: 2-wire

OFF Speech Line: 4-wire

7OFF ×Fixed

ON E&M Control

Idle: Ground Busy: Battery

OFF E&M Control

Idle: Open Busy: Ground

SW4/5 Terminating Imped-

ance Balancing Network

12346

OFF OFF OFF OFF ON

ON OFF OFF OFF ON

2.16µ F

600Ω

350Ω

1KΩ

0.21µ F

(EIA/TIA -464A)

600Ω

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 563

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Reference : Table of Fixed PADs

:When SW2-8 is set to “ON”. (other than the case of )

:When SW2-8 is set to “OFF”. (i.e PAD for TS003 is provided; only for Australia)

ARTD COMMAND

PAD DATA

PAD VALUE [dB]

4W E&M LD/2W E&M

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE

0P0P1000-6

-6

5P2P3000-6

7 00000-6

APAD COMMAND

PAD DATA

PAD VALUE [dB]

4W E&M LD/2W E&M

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE

-6

5P2P3000-6

15 00000-6

1 2

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 564

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

6. External Interface

Accommodation of LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-172.

See also: Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID ∞ 2W E&M)

Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)

2400 ODT CABLE Lead Accommodation

2400 ODT CABLE-A Lead Accommodation

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B0 (TB0)

B1 (TB1) A0 (TA0)

Accommodated in 1

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

A1 (TA1)

A2 (TA2)

A3 (TA3)

B2 (TB2)

B3 (TB3)

Accommodated in 2

B4 (TB4)

B5 (TB5) A4 (TA4)

A5 (TA5)

A6 (TA6)

A7 (TA7)

B6 (TB6)

B7 (TB7)

RB0

RB1 RA0

RA1

RA2

RA3

RB2

RB3

M1 E0

B0 (TB0)

B1 (TB1) A0 (TA0)

A1 (TA1)

A2 (TA2)

A3 (TA3)

B2 (TB2)

B3 (TB3)

B4 (TB4)

B5 (TB5) A4 (TA4)

A5 (TA5)

A6 (TA6)

A7 (TA7)

B6 (TB6)

B7 (TB7)

RB0

RB1 RA0

RA1

RA2

RA3

RB2

RB3

M1 E0

1212 12

12 1212

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 565

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-172 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2)

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

B0 (TB0)

B1 (TB1) A0 (TA0)

Accommodated in 3

LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector

A1 (TA1)

A2 (TA2)

A3 (TA3)

B2 (TB2)

B3 (TB3)

B4 (TB4)

B5 (TB5) A4 (TA4)

A5 (TA5)

A6 (TA6)

A7 (TA7)

B6 (TB6)

B7 (TB7)

RB0

RB1 RA0

RA1

RA2

RA3

RB2

RB3

M1 E0

333333

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 566

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-173 Connecting Route Diagram (LD/DID • 2W E&M)

PBX

NETWORK

LT Connector

Installation Cable

PA-8TLTR

• LD/DID

• 2W E&M

PBX

LT Connector

Installation Cable

PA-8TLTR

E0 E

M0 M

E3 E

M3 M

E4 E

M4 M

E7 E

M7 M

2-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

2-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

2-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

2-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

2400 ODT CABLE

This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a LD or DID trunk.

This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 2-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, E&M leads

for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.

ODT Connector

MDF

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 567

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-174 Connecting Route Diagram (4W E&M)

• 4W E&M

PBX

A0(TA0)

B0(TB0)

LT Connector

Installation Cable

PA-8TLTR

RA0 RA

RB0 RB

4-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

4-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

4-WIRE

CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

2400 ODT CABLE

ODT connector

E0 E

M0 M

A4(TA4)

B4(TB4)

RA4 RA

RB4 RB

E4 E

M4 M

A7(TA7)

B7(TB7)

RA7 RA

RB7 RB

E7 E

M7 M

This diagram shows connecting route diagram when the PA-8TLTR is used as a 4-wire E&M trunk. In this instance, RA, RB, and

E&M leads for channels #4 - #7 appear from the "ODT" connector equipped on the front edge of this card.

MDF

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 568

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-175 “2400 ODT CABLE” Lead Accommodation

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

To "ODT" connector To MDF

Champ Connector (Female)

"2400 ODT CABLE"

3m (10 feet)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

Champ Connector

10A

11A

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

10B

11B

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

ODT Connector

"2400 ODT CABLE"

• 2400 ODT CABLE

The "2400 ODT CABLE" has one ODT connector whose lead accommodation is shown below.

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

Note: Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 569

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

Figure 3-176 “2400 ODT CABLE-A” Lead Accommodation

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

Champ Connectors

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

10A

11A

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

10B

11B

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

ODT Connectors

"2400 ODT CABLE-A"

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

10A

11A

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

10B

11B

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

10A

11A

12A

13A

14A

15A

16A

17A

10B

11B

12B

13B

14B

15B

16B

17B

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

RA4

RA5

RA6

RA7

(DE) (DE)

channel #4

channel #5

channel #6

channel #7

(AS0)

(AS1)

(AS2)

(AS3)

(AS4)

(AS5)

(AS6)

(AS7)

(AL0)

(AL1)

(AL2)

(AL3)

(AL4)

(AL5)

(AL6)

(AL7)

(DE) (DE)

RB4

RB5

RB6

RB7

To ODT Connector

To MDF

• 2400 ODT CABLE-A

The "2400 ODT CABLE-A" has three ODT connectors whose lead accommodation is shown below.

(NC) (NC)

(

)(

)

Note: Leads in round brackets are not used for the time being.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 570

Revision 1.0

PA-8TLTR

Tie Line Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM MB

(SW00)

MB0-7

(SW01)

SW0

(SW10)

SW1

(SW15)

SW2

(SW20)

SW3

(SW25)

SW4

(SW30)

SW5

(SW40)

OFF

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

12345678 ON

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

12345678 ON

12 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 571

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

1. General Function

This circuit card is used to provide an interface between the Attendant Console(s) and the external

recording/paging equipment as shown in the figure below. Occupying every two slots within a PIM, a

single interface adapter can handle a maximum of six ATTCONs and one-or two-circuit recording/paging

equipment to combine. The connection patterns for the devices and service activation via ATTCONs can

vary, depending on key settings on the card (see Section 5, 'Switch Settings' for details).

Figure 3-177 Location of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP) within the System

MDF

Max.6

Max.3

RECC/PGADP

MDF Recording Device

Paging Device

Recording Device

MDF

RECC/PGADP

MDF

ATTCON

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 572

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The mounting locations of this circuit card are shown below. Note that this circuit card requires a vacancy

of two consecutive slots.

Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards.

PIM

Mounting Module

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2300

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 573

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

Face layout of each lamp, switch and connector on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-178.

Figure 3-178 Face Layout of PA-M87 (RECC/PGADP)

4. Lamp Indications

The table below shows the meaning of lamp indications.

LAMP NAME COLOR MEANING

ATT0 ~ ATT5

Green

(Steady-“ON”)

Provided that any of the ATTCONs has a connection to the Recording/Paging

equipment via the card, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON number(s)

emit(s) steady light.

Green

(Flash)

Provided that any of the ATTCONs has not established a connection with the

Recording/Paging equipment, the lamp(s) corresponding to the cited ATTCON

number(s) emit(s) flashing light.

ATT5

ATT4

ATT3

ATT2

ATT1

VR0

SW12 SW13

SW11

SW10

SW14

SW15

REC/PGA

(To MDF)

VR1

ATT0

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 574

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

5. Switch Settings

Switch settings on the card and their detailed meanings are as follows:

Note 1: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW12 and SW13.

Note 2: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10

ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop

start (momentary)

OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #0 by loop

start (constant)

ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop

start (momentary)

OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #1 by loop

start (constant)

ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop

start (momentary)

OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #2 by loop

start (constant)

ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop

start (momentary)

OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #3 by loop

start (constant)

ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop

start (momentary)

OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #4 by loop

start (constant)

ON Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop

start (momentary)

OFF Recording/Paging start control at ATTCON #5 by loop

start (constant)

ON No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine

= 6 : 1 Note 1

OFF No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine

= 3 : 1 × 2 sets Note 1

ON Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal

sending (momentary) Note 2

OFF Recording/Paging activation by loop/ground start signal

sending (constant) Note 2

PATTERN FOR START SIGNAL TRANSMISSION KEY SETTING

(SW10-8) KEY SETTING

(SW14, SW15)

Momentary Loop Start/Momentary Ground Start ON Up

Constant Loop Start/Constant Ground Start OFF Up

Telephone Loop (Handset lifting) OFF Down

ON 12345678

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 575

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

Warning: When the Remote Phone is not used, be sure to turn the SW11 to the left side. If the switch key is left on

the right side, the machine components may be damaged by over current.

Note 3: To validate this switch setting, also operate the following keys (SW10-8, SW14, SW15) as required.

Note 4: This switch setting becomes effective parallel with the key operations of SW10-7.

SWITCH NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW11 RIGHT Remote Phone is used.

LEFT Remote Phone is not used.

SW12

SW13 UP No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine

= 6 : 1 Note 4

DOWN No. of ATTCONs: Recording/Paging machine

= 3 : 1 × 2 sets Note 4

SW14

SW15 UP

Patterns for Recording/Paging activation:

by loop start/ground start signal sending

Note 3

DOWN

Patterns for Recording/Paging activation:

via the telephone loop (handset lifting)Note 3

VR0

(Volume Resistance)

Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for

1st circuit of Recording/Paging machine.

VR1

(Volume Resistance)

Voice output adjustment - GAIN (0 ~ +20dB) - for

2nd circuit of Recording/Paging machine.

321

Left Ri

DOWN

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 576

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

6. External Interface

The location of REC/PGA connector leads and their connection diagram are shown in Figure 3-179.

Figure 3-179 REC/PGA Connector Leads

See also Connecting Route Diagram. (Figure 3-180)

Location of REC/PGA Connector Leads

50 24

CHAMP Connector (J)

REC/PGA

K1B

M0B

K0B

M2B

M1B

K2B

K4B

M3B

K3B

M5B

M4B

K5B

L0B

L1B

T0B

T1B

K1A

M0A

K0A

M2A

M1A

K2A

K4A

M3A

K3A

M5A

M4A

K5A

L0A

L1A

T0A

T1A

T0C

T1C

For Recording/Paging Machine #0

For Recording/Paging Machine #1 Note

For ATT #0

For ATT #1

For ATT #2

For ATT #3

For ATT #4

For ATT #5

Note: These leads are used when the two - circuit system is adopted for the Recording/Paging service features

(No. of ATTCON: Output Equipment = 3 : 1 × 2 circuits).

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 577

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (1/4)

PBX

RECC/

PGADP

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

MDF

To ATT

To Recording/

Paging machine

Note 3

50FLT-CHAMP

CABLE

Front

connector

[ In case telephone set loop is used for Recording/Paging activation]

Telephone Terminal

Side Leads

Speech Signal

Leads

Note 1

Note 2

Note 1: For speech signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.

Note 2: For control signal output leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.

Note 3: There is restriction here in case a Recording machine is used: The Recording machine should be the type

which is fixed between the Central Office and telephone terminals.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 578

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (2/4)

PBX

RECC/

PGADP

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

T0C

MDF

To ATT

50FLT-CHAMP

CABLE

[ In case Recording/Paging is activated by the loop start or ground start signal sending ]

Speech Signal

Leads

Loop Start Leads

Ground Start Leads

To Recording/

Paging machine

Note 1: For speech signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.

Note 2: For control signal leads toward Recording/Paging equipment.

Front

connector

Note 1

Note 2

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 579

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (3/4)

PBX

RECC/

PGADP

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

T0C

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

T0C

MDF

To ATT

50FLT-CHAMP

CABLE

RECC/

PGADP

50FLT-CHAMP

CABLE

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

To ATT

[ In case 7 or more ATTCONs are connected to a single Recording/Paging machine ]

Front

connector

Note 1

Note 2

To Recording/

Paging machine

Note 1: To use a single Recording/Paging machine for 7 or more ATTCONs, the necessary number of PA-M87

card(s) must be reinforced, according the ATT number, on the side of the ICS. If this is the case, provide

relevant multiple connections between the first-card connector leads and the leads due for the reinforced

circuit card(s). Note that the connection should be performed on the MDF and each connector lead name must

be identical in each connection proccess.

(example) L0A (below) L0A (above)

T0A (below) T0A (above) L0B (below) L0B (above)

T0B (below) T0B (above)

Note 2: When performing the multiple connections, the leads here (“ZA” and “ZB”) must be given another multiple

connection in addition to that required in a normal pattern (refer to Note 1).

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 580

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

Figure 3-180 Connecting Route Diagram (4/4)

PBX

RECC/

PGADP

M0A

M0B

K0A

K0B

L0A

L0B

T0A

T0B

T0C

MDF

To TLT

50FLT-CHAMP

CABLE

[ In case the TLT card (analog station) is connected instead of ATTCONs ]

Front

connector

To Paging

Machine

E&M Signal Leads

Speech Signal

Leads

Loop Start Leads

Note

Note : When the Paging machine is to be activated by the ground start, connect the T0B lead to the ground.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 581

Revision 1.0

PA-M87

Recording / Paging Device Adapter

7. Switch Setting Sheet

SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

SW10

SW11

SW12

SW13

SW14

SW15

VR0

(Volume Resistance)

VR1

(Volume Resistance)

ON 12345678

321

Left Ri

DOWN

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 582

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

1. General Function

The PA-24PRTB-A (PRT) circuit card is a digital interface supporting voice and data communications at

1.5 M bit/sec. Being equipped with a Link Access Procedure for a D channel (LAP D) controller based on

the ITU-T I/Q series, this card provides a Primary Rate Access Interface (PRI) with the system. A built-in

resonance circuit extracts clock signals, which are supplied from the network, so that the system may be in

exact synchronization with the network. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is also equipped with

a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily

selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.

Figure 3-181 Location of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) within the System

I/O Local Bus

CPU

System Clock

INT TSW INT

Speech Path (PCM Signal)

D-channel Signaling Link

2-wire

PLO

1.544MHz Clock

Extraction from Network

24ch

ISDN

NETWORK

24PRT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 583

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

2. Mounting Location / Condition

The PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT) card can be mounted in the following shaded universal slots as shown below.

Note: This card cannot be mounted in slot 5.

This card cannot use Group0 (G=00) of Unit0 (U=0) of even-number Module Group.

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-182.

Figure 3-182 Face Layout of PA-24PRTB-A (24PRT)

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots Universal Slots

Note

OPE

N-OPE

BL23

BL00

MODE

CN2

1LB

PCM

BER

AIS

FRM

RMT

DOPE

PKT LYR

SW0

SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

SW1

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 584

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Table 3-15 PA-24PRTB-A Lamp Indication Reference

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM Red Lights when input signal down is detected (PCM LOSS).

FRM Red Lights when frame alignment loss is detected.

PER Red Lights when a CRC error occur frequently.

RMT Red Lights on receiving Remote Alarm Indication (RAI).

AIS Yellow Lights on detection of AIS.

DOPE Green Remains lit while the D Channel Controller is on.

LYR Green Lights when the link of the D channel is set up.

RKT Green Lights when the packet of the D channel is in use.

BL00

BL23

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM).

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

(When BL23 is in used as D channel, lamp is always on.)

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 585

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

MB UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

MODE 5 AT&T (#4/#5 ESS)

7 NT DMS 100/DMS 250

10 Q-SIG. (ETS 300 172)

LB 0ON Internal loop back set

OFF ×Internal loop back cancel

1ON Line loop back set

OFF ×Line loop back cancel

2ON Payload loop back set

OFF ×Payload loop back cancel

3ON D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request

OFF ×D-channel Handler (DCH) make busy request cancel

SW0 1ON ×Impedance 100 Ω

OFF Impedance 110 Ω

2ON Send transformer middle point Ground

OFF ×Send transformer middle point Open

3ON Receive transformer middle point Ground

OFF ×Receive transformer middle point Open

4ON ×Fixed

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 586

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW1 1OFF ×Standard setting (Digital PAD/ROM selection)

2ON ×Fixed

3ON Interface structure: 24B

OFF ×Interface structure: 23B + D

4ON D channel packet service is provided.

OFF ×D channel packet service is not provided.

SW2

4ON ×24-Multiframe

5ON ×Zero Suppress Select B8ZS (24-multiframe)

6ON ×Standard setting

7OFF ×Standard setting

8ON ×Line fault is notified to the upper CPU.

OFF Line fault is not notified to the upper CPU.

SW3 1OFF ×Fixed

2OFF ×Fixed

3OFF ×Alarm processing select Fixed to OFF

4OFF ×Main Signal All 1 supervision is not made.

5ON ×Fixed

6ON ×Fixed

7ON ×Fixed

8ON ×Fixed

SETTING OF EQUALIOZER

SW2-1 SW2-2 SW2-3 DISTANCE

OFF

0 ~

40 ~

80 ~

120 ~

160 ~

40m

80m

120m

160m

200m

Other combinations Not allowed

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 587

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW4 1OFF ×Fixed (D channel)

2ON ×D Channel Mode Selection; Used Side

OFF D Channel Mode Selection; Network Side

3ON D Channel Signal Logic; Negative

OFF ×D Channel Signal Logic; Positive (Standard)

4ON ×

5ON ×

6ON ×Fixed

7ON ×Fixed

8ON ×Fixed

SW5

ON ×PAD Pattern Selection

Note: When setting this switch, refer to Digital PAD

Setting Table.

OFF

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

4ON ×

OFF

5ON

OFF ×

6ON ×

OFF

7ON ×

OFF

8ON IDLE code is sent out.

OFF ×IDLE code is not sent out.

SW4-4 SW4-5 D-channel Speed

OFF

64 kbps (Standard)

Not used

56 kbps

Not used

SW5-1 SW5-2 SW5-3 PAD Pattern

ON OFF ON PAD Pattern 1

OFF OFF ON PAD Pattern 2

ON ON OFF A→µ Loss (Bothway)

OFF ON OFF A→µ Loss (Receive)

ON OFF OFF µ→A Loss (Bothway)

OFF OFF OFF µ→A Loss (Receive)

SW5-4 SW5-5 DIGITAL PAD CONTROL

OFF

Both directions

Receive only (Standard)

Send only

ARTD Fixed

SW5-6 SW5-7 DATA PAD CONTROL

OFF

64 k (Standard)

56 k AT & T

64 k INV.

48 k PROTIMS

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 588

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24PRTB-A

This card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD patterns have been already

written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by key setting of

the SW 5 (elements 1, 2, 3) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD command - PAD.

The selected PAD pattern and the programmed ARTD PAD data correspond as listed below.

Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.

PAD DATA

ARTD

PAD

PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 µ→A Loss

(Bothway) µ→A Loss

(Receive) A→µ Loss

(Bothway) A→µ Loss

(Receive)

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE

1 2 [dB] 2 [dB] -3 [dB]

Note 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]

2 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]

3 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]

4 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]

5 PAD value complies with key settings of SW5-6,7. (Irrelevant to PAD patterns)

7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 589

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

6. External Interface

Figure 3-183 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-184).

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector

POUTB

POUTA

POUTB

POUTA

POUTB

POUTA

1232 1

132132 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 590

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

Figure 3-184 Connecting Route Diagram

POUTA

POUTB

DIU1A

DIU1B

PLO

PBX MDF

clock extraction

24 PRT To DSU

(Digital

Service

Unit)

Note

OUT

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24PRTB-A circuit card is as follows.

Note: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information on

the PLO card, see Chapter 2 in this manual.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 591

Revision 1.0

PA-24PRTB-A

Primary Rate Interface Trunk

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM

MODE

SW0

SW1

SW2

SW3

SW4

SW5

MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

ON 2 3 4

ON 2 3 456 7 8

ON 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 592

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

1. General Function

The PA-24DTR (24DTI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital trunks and the system at

1.544 Mbit/s. This card can be also used as an interface for a Common Channel Interoffice Signaling

(CCIS) or an ISDN network when being connected to an additional CCH or DCH circuit card with a flat

cable as illustrated below. A built-in resonance circuit can be used for the purpose of extracting clock sig-

nals when the PBX functions as a PLO-secondary switch. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is

equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value

can be easily selected by key settings and programming from the MAT.

Figure 3-185 Location of PA-24DTR (DTI) within the System

I/O Local

Bus

CPU

System Clock

INT TSW INT

CCH/DCH

Flat Cable

PLO

1.544MHz Clock Extraction

(for a PLO-secondary office)

24ch

DIGITAL

NETWORK

Note

DTI(PA-24DTR)

: Common Channel Signaling Link

: Speech Path (PCM signal)

: Clock Signal

Note: When PA-24DTR is used in an Associated Channel Interoffice Signaling (ACIS) system, CCH/DCH is not required.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 593

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-24DTR (DTI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots Universal Slots

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 594

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-186. Note that

there are two types of PA-24DTR (DTI) cards which differ in their face layouts.

Figure 3-186 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DTI)

OPE

N-OPE

PCM

BL23

BER

AIS

FRM

RMT

CN2

BL00

SW15

SW13B

SW13

SW12

SW11

SW10

OPE

N-OPE

SW00

PCM

BL23

BER

AIS

FRM

RMT

CN2

BL00

SW01

SW6C

SW4D

SW14

SW5D

SW25

SW39

SW58

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 595

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM Red Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS).

FRM Red Lights in the case of frame alignment loss.

BER Red Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error

occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.

RMT Red Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.

AIS Yellow Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).

BL00

BL23

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the

corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60IPM).

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 596

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Note: This switch setting is applicable for a system adopts Associated Channel Interoffice Signalling (ACIS).

Figure 3-187 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ¥Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01/13B 0ON Internal Loopback : Set

OFF ¥Internal Loopback : Cancel

1ON External Loopback : Set

OFF ¥External Loopback : Cancel

2ON Payload Loopback : Set

OFF ¥Payload Loopback : Cancel

3ON All Channel Make Busy : Set Note

OFF ¥All Channel Make Busy : Cancel

Switch

TDSW Interface

PAD

Speech Path

Control Block

Framer

Line Interface

DIGITAL

NETWORK

External Loopback

(Line Loopback)

Payload Loopback

Internal Loopback

Speech Path

PA-24 DTR (DTI)

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the

SW01/13B.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 597

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW15/25 1ON ×Impedance Setting: 100 [Ω]

OFF Impedance Setting: 110 [Ω]

2ON Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground

OFF ×Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open

3ON Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground

OFF ×Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open

4ON Idle Code: To be sent out

OFF ×Not to be sent out

SW11/39

ON PAD Control

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

ON ×Data PAD Control

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON T Signal Control

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON R Signal Control

OFF

ON ×

OFF

SW11/39-1 SW11/39-2 PAD Control

ON ON Bothway

OFF ON Receive only (Send 0dB)

ON OFF Send only (Receive 0dB)

OFF OFF Fixed to ARTD command

SW11/39-3 SW11/39-4 Data PAD Value

ON ON 64 Kbps

OFF ON 56 Kbps

ON OFF 48 Kbps

OFF OFF 64 Kbps INV

SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control

ON ON ABCD

OFF ON ABAB

ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited

OFF OFF AAAA

SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control

ON ON ABCD

OFF ON ABAB

ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited

OFF OFF AAAA

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 598

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10/4D 1ON Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative

OFF ×Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive

2ON Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative

OFF ×Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive

3ON RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out

OFF ×RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out

4ON ×Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: Not to be controlled

OFF Simultaneous Seizure Supervision: To be controlled

5ON ×Data Link Control: MOS

OFF Data Link Control: BOS (For NEAX2400 ICS)

6ON Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe

OFF Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe

ON Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

OFF Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)

8ON When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for

North America specification.

(For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.)

OFF

SW12/58

1ON Equalizer Setting

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance

ON ON ON 0~133 (ft)/0~40 (m)

ON ON OFF 133~267 (ft)/40~80 (m)

ON OFF ON 267~400 (ft)/80~120 (m)

ON OFF OFF 400~533(ft)/120~160 (m)

OFF ON ON 533~667(feet)/

160~200(m)

Other Combinations Impossible

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 599

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW12/58

ON PAD Pattern Selection

Note: When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting

Table.

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON ×Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.

(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 Setting is OFF.)

OFF

ON ×

OFF

SW14/5D

ON Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM

Spec.)

OFF ×Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK

ROM Spec.)

2ON ×LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive

OFF LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative

3ON Send a notice in the event of a line fault.

OFF ×Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault.

4ON Zero Code Suppression is not provided.

OFF Zero Code Suppression is provided.

SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern

OFF ON ON PAD Pattern 1

OFF ON OFF PAD Pattern 2

ON OFF ON A→ µ Loss (Bothway)

ON OFF OFF A→ µ Loss (Receive)

OFF OFF ON µ→Α Loss (Bothway)

OFF OFF OFF µ→Α Loss (Receive)

Other Combinations Impossible

SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm

ON ON Alarm is not sent out

ON OFF

OFF ON All “1”

OFF OFF RMT

Note:

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 600

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW13/6C 1ON ×

Fixed to all ON.

OFF

2ON ×

OFF

3ON ×

OFF

4ON ×

OFF

5ON ×

OFF

6ON ×

OFF

7ON ×

OFF

8ON ×Netfusing : Not used

OFF Netfusing : used

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 601

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DTI)

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD pat-

terns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by

key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card, and programming of the PAD data by the ARTD com-

mand - CDN=30(PAD). The PAD patterns and ARTD data correspond as listed below.

Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.

PAD DATA

ARTD

CDN=30

PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A→µ Loss

(Bothway) A→µ Loss

(Receive) µ→A Loss

(Bothway) µ→A Loss

(Receive)

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE

1 2 [dB] 2 [dB] -3 [dB]

Note 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]

2 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]

3 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]

4 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8[dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]

5 Key settings of SW 11/39 - 3,4 correspond to PAD values. (Regardless of PAD patterns).

7 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 602

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

6. External Interface

The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.

Figure 3-188 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-189).

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector

RB RA

POUTB POUTA

TB TA

RB RA

POUTB POUTA

TB TA

RB RA

POUTB POUTA

TB TA

33 1 1

223 3

PIM

Mounting Module

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 603

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

Figure 3-189 Connecting Route Diagram

POUTA

POUTB

DIU1A

DIU1B

PLO

PBX

MDF

Note 1

DTI CARRIER

EQUIPMENT

Note 2

OUT

Note 1: This cable connection is required when clock signals must be extracted from the network side.

Note 2: As an example, DIU1A and DIU1B leads are used in this diagram. For more information about these

leads, see Chapter 2 in this manual.

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DTI) circuit card is as follows.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 604

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DTI)

Digital Trunk Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM SW01/13B

SW10/4D •4-multiframe DTI Standard

•12-multiframe DTI Standard

SW11/39 •24-multiframe DTI Standard

•12-multiframe DTI Standard

SW13/6C •Fixed to all ON.

SW12/58 Note: Equalizer Setting

SW15/25

SW14/5D •24-multiframe DTI Standard

•12-multiframe DTI Standard

SW00/MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

12345678

123456 7 8

12345678

Note

ON 2 3 4

1234

12 3 4

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 605

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

1. General Function

The PA-24DTR (24DLI) circuit card provides an interface between 24 digital lines and the system at 1.544

Mbit/s. To obtain appropriate speech level, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which typical PAD

patterns have been already written. A desired PAD value can be easily selected by key settings.

Note: The key settings become valid when SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1.

Figure 3-190 Location of PA-24DTR (DLI) within the System

I/O Local

Bus

CPU

INT TSW INT

24ch

TERMINAL

EQUIPMENT

DLI(PA-24DTR)

: Speech Path (PCM signal)

: Clock Signal

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 606

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

2. Mounting Location/Condition

The PA-24DTR (DLI) card can be mounted in the following shaded slots as shown below.

PIM

Mounting Module

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Universal Slots Universal Slots

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 607

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors

The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-191. Note that

there are two types of PA-24DTR (DLI) cards which differ in their face layouts.

Figure 3-191 Face Layout of PA-24DTR (DLI)

OPE

N-OPE

PCM

BER

AIS

FRM

RMT

CN2

SW15

SW13

SW12

SW11

SW10

OPE

N-OPE

SW00

PCM

BL23

BER

AIS

FRM

RMT

CN2

BL00

SW01

BL23

BL00

SW01

SW6C

SW4D

SW14

SW5D

SW25

SW39

SW58

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 608

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

4. Lamp Indications

The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

LAMP NAME COLOR STATE

OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation.

N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state.

PCM Red Lights in the case of input signal down (PCM LOSS).

FRM Red Lights in the case of frame alignment loss.

BER Red Lights when frequent bit errors occur in the case of 12-multiframe and when a CRC error

occurs frequently in the case of 24-multiframe.

RMT Red Lights on receipt of remote alarm indication.

AIS Yellow Lights on receipt of Alarm Information Signal (AIS).

BL00

BL23

Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy.

Flash Flashes while DP signals are being sent out or received (Flashes to dial pulses), or the

corresponding circuit is in make-busy state (60 IPM).

OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 609

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

5. Switch Settings

Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below.

Figure 3-192 Available Locations for Loopback Testing

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW00

(MB)

UP Circuit card make busy

DOWN ×Circuit card make busy cancel

SW01/13B 0ON Internal Loopback : Set

OFF ×Internal Loopback : Cancel

1ON External Loopback : Set

OFF ×External Loopback : Cancel

2ON Payload Loopback : Set

OFF ×Payload Loopback : Cancel

3OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF)

Switch

TDSW Interface

PAD

Speech Path

Control Block

Framer

Line Interface

TERMINAL

EQUIPMENT

External Loopback

(Line Loopback)

Payload Loopback

Internal Loopback

Speech Path

PA-24 DTR (DLI)

As illustrated below, loopback testing can be performed at three locations on this card by key setting of the SW01/13B.

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 610

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW15/25

1ON ×Impedance Setting: 100 [Ω]

OFF Impedance Setting: 110 [Ω]

2ON Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Ground

OFF ×Transformer at Middle Point - Transmission: Open

3ON Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Ground

OFF ×Transformer at Middle Point - Receive: Open

4ON Idle Code: To be sent out

OFF ×Not to be sent out

SW11/39

ON One Digit Dialing: Valid

OFF ×One Digit Dialing: Invalid

2OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF)

3OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF)

4OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF)

ON T Signal Control

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON R Signal Control

OFF

ON ×

OFF

SW11/39-5 SW11/39-6 T Signal Control

ON ON ABCD

OFF ON ABAB

ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited

OFF OFF AAAA

SW11/39-7 SW11/39-8 R Signal Control

ON ON ABCD

OFF ON ABAB

ON OFF Bit Steal Inhibited

OFF OFF AAAA

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 611

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW10/4D 1ON Transmission Signal A Logic: Negative

OFF ×Transmission Signal A Logic: Positive

2ON Receiving Signal A Logic: Negative

OFF ×Receiving Signal A Logic: Positive

3ON RMT Alarm Sending: Not to be sent out

OFF ×RMT Alarm Sending: To be sent out

4OFF ×Not used (Fixed to OFF)

5ON ×Data Link Control: MOS

OFF Data Link Control: BOS

6ON Multiframe Selection: 12-Multiframe

OFF Multiframe Selection: 24-Multiframe

ON Signal Selection: AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)

OFF Signal Selection: B8ZS (Bipolar with 8 Zeros Substitution)

8ON When this switch is set to ON, Alarm Processing is selected for

North America specification.

(For NEAX2400 ICS, this Switch Setting is OFF.)

OFF

SW12/58

1ON Equalizer Setting

OFF

2ON

OFF

3ON

OFF

SW12/58-1 SW12/58-2 SW12/58-3 Distance

ON ON ON 0~133 (feet)/0~40 (m)

ON ON OFF 133~267 (feet)/40~80 (m)

ON OFF ON 267~400 (feet)/80~120 (m)

ON OFF OFF 400~533 (feet)/120~160 (m)

OFF ON ON 533~667 (feet)/160~200 (m)

Other Combinations Impossible

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 612

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW12/58

ON PAD Pattern Selection

Note: When setting this key, refer to Digital PAD Setting

Table.

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

ON ×

OFF

ON ×Alarm Sending when this circuit card is in N-OPE state.

(For NEAX2400 ICS, Switch 12/58-7 standard Setting is

OFF.)

OFF

ON ×

OFF

SW14/5D

ON Digital PAD ROM Selection: Special Specification (PROM

Spec.)

OFF ×Digital PAD ROM Selection: Standard Specification (MASK

ROM Spec.)

2ON ×LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Positive

OFF LAYER 2 Signal Logic: Negative

3ON Send a notice in the event of a line fault.

OFF ×Do not send a notice in the event of a line fault.

4ON Zero Code Suppression is not provided.

OFF Zero Code Suppression is provided.

SW12/58-4 SW12/58-5 SW12/58-6 PAD Pattern

OFF ON ON PAD Pattern 1

OFF ON OFF PAD Pattern 2

ON OFF ON A→ µ Loss (Bothway)

ON OFF OFF A→ µ Loss (Receive)

OFF OFF ON µ→Α Loss (Bothway)

OFF OFF OFF µ→Α Loss (Receive)

Other Combinations Impossible

SW12/58-7 SW12/58-8 Kind of Alarm

ON ON Alarm is not sent out

ON OFF

OFF ON All “1”

OFF OFF RMT

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 613

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

Note: This PAD value table is PAD pattern 1. If other PAD pattern is required, assign PAD pattern by elements

4~6 of SW12/58. The elements become valid when assigning ASYD SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=1. When ASYD

SYS1 INDEX4 bit5=0, PAD value is “0dB”.

SWITCH

NAME SWITCH

NO. SETTING STANDARD

SETTING MEANING

SW13/6C 1ON Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Valid

OFF ×Main Signal All 1 Supervision: Invalid

2ON ×Ringer Control: Continuous

OFF Ringer Control: Intermittent

ON Sending PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note

OFF ×

ON ×

OFF

ON Receiving PAD Value Selection (PAD Pattern1) Note

OFF ×

SW13/6C-3 SW13/6C-4 SW13/6C-5 PAD Value

OFF OFF OFF 0 dB

OFF OFF ON 2 dB

OFF ON OFF 4 dB

OFF ON ON 6 dB

ON OFF OFF 8 dB

ON OFF ON 0 dB

ON ON OFF 0 dB

ON ON ON 0 dB

SW13/6C-6 SW13/6C-7 SW13/6C-8 PAD Value

OFF OFF OFF 0 dB

OFF OFF ON 2 dB

OFF ON OFF 4 dB

OFF ON ON 6 dB

ON OFF OFF 8 dB

ON OFF ON 0 dB

ON ON OFF 0 dB

ON ON ON 0 dB

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 614

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

Digital PAD Setting Table for PA-24DTR (DLI)

As mentioned in General Function, this card is equipped with a mask ROM in which the following typical PAD pat-

terns have been already written. PAD value is determined by selecting a desired PAD pattern, which can be done by

key setting of the SW 12/58 (elements 4, 5, 6) on this card.

Note: - represents “GAIN” in this table.

SW13/6C

SEND-3,4,5

RECEIVE-6,7,8

PAD Pattern (selected by key setting)

PAD Pattern 1 PAD Pattern 2 A→µ Loss

(Bothway) A→µ Loss

(Receive) µ→A Loss

(Bothway) µ→A Loss

(Receive)

345

SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE SEND RECEIVE

678

OFF OFF OFF 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] Through Through Through Through Through Through Through Through

OFF OFF ON 2 [dB] 2 [dB] -3 [dB]

Note 3 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB] 0 [dB]

OFF ON OFF 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 3 [dB] 3 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 4 [dB] 0 [dB] 4 [dB]

OFF ON ON 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB] 6 [dB] 6 [dB] 0 [dB] 12 [dB]

ON OFF OFF 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 3 [dB] 9 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 8 [dB] 0 [dB] 8 [dB]

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 615

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

6. External Interface

The leads appear as follows on the LT connectors.

Figure 3-193 LT Connector Lead Accommodation

See also Connecting Route Diagram (Figure 3-194).

PIM

Mounting Module

50 24

232221201918171615141312111009080706050403020100

LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5

231915

221814

211713

201612

231915

221814

211713

201612

110907050301

100806040200

110907050301

100806040200

HW11HW10HW9HW8HW7HW6HW5HW4HW3HW2HW1HW0

Group No.

Slot No.

LT Connector

PIM

Highway Block

LT 3, 5, 9, 11 Connector

50 24

Accommodated in 2

LT 2, 4, 8, 10 Connector

Accommodated in 3

50 24

Accommodated in 1

LT 1, 5, 7, 11 Connector

RB RA

POUTB POUTA

TB TA

RB RA

POUTB POUTA

TB TA

RB RA

POUTB POUTA

TB TA

33 1 1

223 3

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 616

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

Figure 3-194 Connecting Route Diagram

PBX

MDF

DLI TERMINAL

EQUIPMENT

OUT

Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24DTR (DLI) circuit card is as follows.

NDA-24296 CHAPTER 3

Page 617

Revision 1.0

PA-24DTR (DLI)

Digital Line Interface

7. Switch Setting Sheet

MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH

NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS

PIM SW00 (MB)

SW01/13B

SW10/4D •24-multiframe DLI Standard

•12-multiframe DLI Standard

SW11/39 •24-multiframe DLI Standard

•12-multiframe DLI Standard

SW13/6C

SW12/58 Note: Equalizer Setting

SW15/25

SW14/5D •24-multiframe DLI Standard

•12-multiframe DLI Standard

SW00/MB DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel

12345678

123456 7 8

12345678

Note

ON 2 3 4

1234

CHAPTER 3 NDA-24296

Page 618

Revision 1.0

This page is for your notes.

Nec 2400 Ipx Users Manual NEAX2400 Circuit Card

PDF NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1 T E X T F I L E S

IPX Circuit Card Manual Iss 1(2429610w) IPX Circuit Card Manual Iss 1(2429610w)

NEC IPX Circuit Card Manual Issue 1 NEC_IPX_Circuit_Card_Manual_Issue_1 www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

2400 IPX to the manual 0664b456-d22f-4a22-a36c-0ef294a737d6

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation